JP2020171799A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing performance effects.SOLUTION: A window 51 includes a first transmission body 250 and a second transmission body 260 that is disposed closer to a game area 10 side than the first transmission body and has a hole 270 formed therein. At least a part of a first movable body 300 can enter a space S formed between the first transmission body and the second transmission body through the hole. The operation speed is different between a first operation ACT1 in which the first movable body is operated at a first position P1 that does not allow entry between the first transmission body and the second transmission body and a second operation ACT2 in which the first movable body is operated at a second position P2 that allows entry between the first transmission body and the second transmission body. In addition, There are provided a first pattern of operation + notification and a second pattern of operation only as patterns in which a first upper combination 9029 L and a second upper combination 9029 R operate, and during a normal game, the first pattern is higher in big winning expectation degree than the second pattern.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 33

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

When the movable body (accessory) provided in the game frame operates as shown in Patent Document 1, there is a device that notifies the operation of the movable body on the screen of the liquid crystal display device.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-67423

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, only the effect of notifying that the movable body provided in the game frame operates is provided, so that the effect of the effect using the movable body provided in the game frame is interesting. Could not be improved sufficiently.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of production using a movable body provided in a game frame.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present application can be controlled into a plurality of types of gaming states including an advantageous state advantageous to the player and a special state different from the advantageous state and advantageous to the player. It ’s a game machine
Movable body provided in the game frame and
The light emitting means provided on the movable body and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body and the light emission of the light emitting means,
A notification effect means for executing a notification effect for notifying the operation of the movable body is provided.
The control means controls the operation of the movable body by a first pattern of operating the movable body in relation to the notification effect and a second pattern of operating the movable body not related to the notification effect. ,
The degree of expectation to be controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on whether the movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern.
The control means
The movable body is controlled by the same operation in the first pattern and the second pattern, and the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled by the same brightness in the first pattern and the second pattern.
When the control is performed in the special state, the control according to the first pattern is not executed, and when the control is performed in the non-special state, the control according to the first pattern can be executed.
As the notification effect, the notification effect means an effect of displaying an image imitating the operation of the movable body on a display means provided at a position not overlapping with the movable body in the front-rear direction.
When the control by the second pattern is executed when the control is performed in the special state, the control by the second pattern is executed when the control is controlled by the non-special state. There is a high degree of expectation that the favorable state will be controlled.
It is characterized by that.
According to such a configuration, the expectation degree of being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern. Therefore, the frame movable body provided in the game frame is used. It is possible to improve the interest of the production that was there.
(1) The gaming machine according to another viewpoint of the present application is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine)
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the first operation that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 allows the first movable body 300 to move to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33. The first action ACT1 that moves to and the second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),
The operating speed differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), the first speed V1 in the first operation and the second speed V2 in the second operation are different, etc. ),
further,
Frame movable bodies (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.) provided so as to be movable in the game frame, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the frame movable body (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.),
It is provided with a notification effect means (effect display device 909, etc.) for executing a notification effect (notification effect, etc. shown in FIG. 74) for notifying the operation of the frame movable body.
The control means has a first pattern (operation + first pattern of notification, etc.) for operating the frame movable body in relation to the notification effect, and a first pattern for operating the frame movable body not related to the notification effect. The movement of the frame movable body is controlled by two patterns (second pattern of movement only, etc.).
Depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 75). , During a normal game, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first pattern is executed than when the second pattern is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation that the frame movable body is controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the interest of the production using the frame movable body provided in the game frame is improved. Can be made to.

(2) The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present application is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine)
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
Light emitting means (for example, movable LED 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.)
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the first operation that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 allows the first movable body 300 to move to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33. The first action ACT1 that moves to and the second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),
The light emitting mode of the light emitting means associated with the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), the first light emitting mode I1 in the first operation and the second operation (Different from the second light emission mode I2, etc.),
further,
Frame movable bodies (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.) provided so as to be movable in the game frame, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the frame movable body (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.),
It is provided with a notification effect means (effect display device 909, etc.) for executing a notification effect (notification effect, etc. shown in FIG. 74) for notifying the operation of the frame movable body.
The control means has a first pattern (operation + first pattern of notification, etc.) for operating the frame movable body in relation to the notification effect, and a first pattern for operating the frame movable body not related to the notification effect. The movement of the frame movable body is controlled by two patterns (second pattern of movement only, etc.).
Depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 75). , During a normal game, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first pattern is executed than when the second pattern is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation that the frame movable body is controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the interest of the production using the frame movable body provided in the game frame is improved. Can be made to.

(3) The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present application is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine)
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
Sound output means capable of outputting directing sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the first operation that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 allows the first movable body 300 to move to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33. The first action ACT1 that moves to and the second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),
The effect sound of the sound output means associated with the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) in the first operation ACT1. ) And the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) in the second operation ACT2 are different),
further,
Frame movable bodies (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.) provided so as to be movable in the game frame, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the frame movable body (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.),
It is provided with a notification effect means (effect display device 909, etc.) for executing a notification effect (notification effect, etc. shown in FIG. 74) for notifying the operation of the frame movable body.
The control means has a first pattern (operation + first pattern of notification, etc.) for operating the frame movable body in relation to the notification effect, and a first pattern for operating the frame movable body not related to the notification effect. The movement of the frame movable body is controlled by two patterns (second pattern of movement only, etc.).
Depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 75). , During a normal game, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first pattern is executed than when the second pattern is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation that the frame movable body is controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the interest of the production using the frame movable body provided in the game frame is improved. Can be made to.

(4) In any of the game machines (1) to (3) above,
A display means capable of executing a display effect (for example, an effect display device 5A or the like) is visibly arranged through the window portion.
The movable body can be positioned at an origin position where the movable body is not superimposed on the display means or a part thereof is superimposed on the display means, and can operate from the origin position to the first position or the second position. Yes, you may.
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(5) In any of the game machines (1) to (4) above,
Specific game information display means (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) related to a game regardless of the position of the movable body. , The specific game information display area 5Z of FIG. 1 and the like) may be provided.
According to this configuration, not only can a powerful movable body effect be provided, but also specific game information related to the game, that is, game information important to the player can be always shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent important game information from becoming invisible due to the movable body effect.

(6) In the game machine of (1) above
The operating speed of the second operation may be higher than the operating speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 34A is larger than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(7) In the game machine of (1) above
The operating speed of the second operation may be smaller than the operating speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 34 (A) is smaller than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce failures due to the second operation of the movable body.

(8) In the game machine of (2) above
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body.
The second operation may have a lower emission brightness of the light emitting means than the first operation (for example, the second brightness I2 in FIG. 34B is smaller than the first brightness I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce glare when approaching the player side.

(9) In the game machine of (2) above
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body.
The second operation may have a higher emission brightness of the light emitting means than the first operation (for example, the second brightness I2 in FIG. 34B is larger than the first brightness I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player dazzle when approaching the player side, and it is possible to provide a light emitting effect with an impact.

(10) In the game machine of (3) above
In the second operation, at least one of the loud volume, the high pitch, and the fast tempo of the effect sound of the sound output means can be executed as compared with the case of the first operation (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 34 (C) may be larger than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(11) In the game machine of (3) above
In the second operation, at least one of the fact that the volume of the effect sound of the sound output means is lower, the pitch is lower, and the tempo is slower than in the case of the first operation can be executed (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 34 (C) may be smaller than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(12) In any of the game machines (1) to (11) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating is different from the second opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened when the movable body is not operating. It may be.
According to this configuration, when the opening / closing door is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be executed according to the presence / absence of operation of the movable body.

(13) In any of the game machines (1) to (12) above,
A control means for controlling the movable body (for example, an effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The control means
A first control (for example, an effect) of moving a predetermined portion of the movable body toward the first transmissive member side through the hole portion or the notch portion until the predetermined portion is located closer to the first transmissive member side than the second transmissive member. In the control CPU 120, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. The part where the first control of moving to the front side until it is located on the front transmission plate 251 side of 261) and
After executing the first control, a second control for moving at least a part of the predetermined portion in a direction intersecting the moving direction in the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executed the first control). After that, the direction (front) in which the first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, intersects the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control. A portion capable of executing the second control for moving upward), or a second protrusion which is a part of a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 after executing the first control. A portion capable of executing a second control for moving the unit 304 in a direction (front-up direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front-down direction) in the first control) and
It is possible to do so.
According to this configuration, after performing the first control for moving the movable body to the first transmission member side, at least a part of the predetermined portion is moved on the first transmission member side of the second transmission member side in the first control. By performing the second control of moving in a direction different from the direction, the player can give an impact, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

(14) In the game machine of (13) above
At least a part of the predetermined portion moves in a direction different from the game area in the second control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is one of the predetermined portions (front half) of the main body 302 in the second control. The first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304, which are the portions, may be moved in a direction (front upward direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control).
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body in the second control can be preferably shown.

(15) In the game machine of (13) or (14) above
Supporting means for supporting the movable body in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, in the first operation mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R supporting the first movable body 300, and the second In the operation mode, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. that supports the first movable body 300 may be provided.
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body and the posture after the movement can be stabilized.

(16) In any of the game machines (13) to (15) above,
A second movable body (for example, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the movable body (for example, the first movable body 300) is provided.
The control means can control to move the second movable body to the movable body so as to be unitable after the first control is performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is after the first control is performed). , A portion capable of controlling the movement of the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. to the first movable body 300).
According to this configuration, since the movable body and the second movable body support each other by the union, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

(17) In the game machine of (16) above
When the second movable body is combined with the movable body, at least a part of the second movable body is arranged closer to the game area than the second transmission member (for example, the second in the first operation mode). When the movable bodies 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300, and when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode, these second The movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are the portions arranged behind the rear transmission plate 261 (see FIGS. 17 and 18). It may be.
According to this configuration, the movable body and the second movable body are located at different positions in the moving direction of the movable body in the first control when they are combined, so that a sense of depth can be generated.

(18) In any of the game machines (13) to (17) above,
The window portion (for example, the window portion 51) can open and close the game area (for example, the game area 10) (see FIG. 3).
The movable body may not come into contact with the second transmissive member when opening and closing the window portion (see FIG. 22).
According to this configuration, damage to the movable body and the second transparent member can be prevented.

(19) In any of the game machines (13) to (18) above,
The movable body is provided with light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) capable of irradiating light toward other than the first transmitting member after performing the first control. (See FIG. 20).
According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the player but also to the surroundings.

(20) In any of the game machines (13) to (19) above,
A game machine frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) having a game board (for example, a game board 2) for forming the game area (for example, a game area 10), and
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that is provided to be openable / closable with respect to the game machine frame and has the window portion (for example, the window portion 51).
A light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9) provided in an area other than the window portion of the opening / closing frame.
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls light emission of the opening / closing door side light emitting component, and
With
The light emitting control means changes the light emitting mode according to the movement of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 includes the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body. A portion capable of changing the light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 to the first to fifth light emitting modes according to the operation of the movable bodies 600L and 600R. See FIG. 19).
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body can be preferably produced.

(21) In the game machine of (20) above
After performing the first control, the light emission control means lowers the brightness as compared with that before performing the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode. Later, a portion for controlling light emission in a second light emitting mode having a lower brightness than the first light emitting mode (see FIG. 20) may be used.
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the transparency of the movable body.

(22) In any of the game machines (13) to (21) above,
A game machine frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) having a game board (for example, a game board 2) for forming the game area (for example, a game area 10), and
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that is provided to be openable / closable with respect to the game machine frame and has the window portion (for example, the window portion 51).
A light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9) provided in an area other than the window portion of the opening / closing frame.
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls light emission of the opening / closing door side light emitting component, and
With
The opening / closing door-side light emitting component is provided so as to be able to irradiate the movable body with light after the first control is performed (for example, the effect LED 9 is a first movable body after the first control is performed. It is provided so that light can be irradiated toward 300. See FIG. 44 (B) of Modification 6).
According to this configuration, the movable body can be made to stand out by light.

(23) In any of the game machines (13) to (22) above,
In the game area (for example, the game area 10), a guide passage (for example, a warp passage 800) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided.
In the guide passage, at least a part of the guide passage passes through the hole portion (for example, the hole portion 271) or the notch portion and is more transparent than the second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260). It may be located on the member (for example, the first transmissive body 250) side (see FIG. 43 (A) of the modified example 3).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(24) In any of the game machines (13) to (23) above,
In the game area (for example, the game area 10), a guide passage (for example, a first warp passage 800A, a second warp passage 800B, etc.) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided.
The guide passage is first transmitted until at least a part of the guide passage is located closer to the first transmission member than the second transmission member through the hole (for example, hole 271) or the notch. It may be movable toward the member side (see FIGS. 43 (B) and 43 (C) of the modified example 5).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described later include the following inventions (25) to (31). Conventionally, when a movable body (accessory) provided in a game frame operates in a game machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-67423, the operation of the movable body is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device. There was something to inform above. However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, only the effect of notifying the operation of the movable body provided in the game frame is provided, so that the effect of the effect using the movable body provided in the game frame is provided. Could not be improved sufficiently. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of improving the interest of the production using the movable body provided in the game frame.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine (25) according to another aspect is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 901 or the like) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state or the like) that is advantageous to the player.
Frame movable bodies (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.) provided so as to be movable in the game frame, and
A control means for controlling the operation of the frame movable body (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.),
It is provided with a notification effect means (effect display device 909, etc.) for executing a notification effect (notification effect, etc. shown in FIG. 74) for notifying the operation of the frame movable body.
The control means has a first pattern (operation + first pattern of notification, etc.) for operating the frame movable body in relation to the notification effect, and a first pattern for operating the frame movable body not related to the notification effect. The movement of the frame movable body is controlled by two patterns (second pattern of movement only, etc.).
The degree of expectation to be controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern (as shown in FIG. 75, the first pattern is in the normal game. The jackpot expectation is higher when the second pattern is executed than when the second pattern is executed).

According to such a configuration, the expectation degree of being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern. Therefore, the frame movable body provided in the game frame is used. It is possible to improve the interest of the production that was there.
(26) In the game machine of (25) above
When the frame movable body operates in the first pattern, the expectation that the frame movable body is controlled to the advantageous state is higher than in the second pattern (as shown in FIG. 75, during the normal game, the first pattern The jackpot expectation is higher when the second pattern is executed than when the second pattern is executed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation that the first pattern will be executed.

(27) In the game machine of (25) or (26) above
The control means controls the frame movable body with the same or the same operation in the first pattern and the second pattern (for example, the upper accessory has the same operation in the first pattern and the second pattern).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the burden of control when operating the frame movable body.

(28) In any of the game machines (25) to (27) above,
The notification effect means notifies an aspect indicating that the frame movable body is operating (as shown in FIG. 74, it indicates that the upper accessory is operating on the screen of the effect display device 909. Displaying the broadcast image 9096, etc.).

According to such a configuration, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the frame movable body is operating.

(29) In any of the game machines (25) to (28) above,
A state control means (game control microcomputer 90560) that can be controlled into a first state (normal state, etc.) and a second state (high base state, probability change state, etc.) that is more easily controlled to the advantageous state than the first state. Etc.)
When it is determined that the control means is controlled to the advantageous state in the second state, the control means controls the operation of the frame movable body by the second pattern (as shown in FIG. 75, in the high base). When the big hit game state is controlled in, the upper accessory is operated according to the second pattern, etc.).

According to such a configuration, in the second state where it is easy to be controlled in an advantageous state, it is possible to suppress the execution of unnecessary effects by controlling the operation of the frame movable body by the second pattern.

(30) In any of the game machines (25) to (29) above,
The game frame is further provided with an effect means (frame LED 9028, etc.) for executing an effect according to the movement of the frame movable body.
The notification effect means executes the notification effect without including the effect by the effect means (as shown in FIG. 74, a notification image showing that the upper accessory is operating on the screen of the effect display device 909). When displaying 9096, the effect of the frame LED 9028 is not displayed, etc.).

According to such a configuration, since the notification effect is executed without including the effect by the effect means, the operation of the frame movable body by the notification effect can be made more conspicuous.

(31) In any of the game machines (25) to (30) above,
The frame movable body is provided so as to be movable between the origin position and a position away from the origin position (as shown in FIG. 62, the upper accessory moves between an angle of 0 degrees and an angle of 90 degrees. It is possible, etc.),
Further provided with driving means (first upper accessory motor 9030L, second upper accessory motor 9030R, etc.) for operating the frame movable body.
The control means
The first motion control for locating the frame movable body at the origin position (non-detection motion control, detection motion control, etc. by the effect control microcomputer 90100) and the frame movable body can operate normally. The second operation control for confirming that (the operation control for confirming the actual operation by the effect control microcomputer 90100, etc.) and the third operation control for performing the effect by the frame movable body (the effect control microcomputer 90100). It is possible to perform a period during which the variable display of the symbol is being executed, a control for executing the upper character effect in the jackpot game state, etc.).
In the second operation control, the frame movable body is controlled to operate within a range of the first speed and the second speed faster than the first speed (when the operation control for confirming the actual operation is executed). Control the upper accessory to operate at a speed within the range of the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed),
In the first motion control, the frame movable body is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the first speed in the second motion control (when the non-detection motion control or the detection motion control is executed, the first motion control is performed. 2 Control so that the upper accessory operates at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the operation control (the same speed as the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control).

According to such a configuration, in the first motion control, the frame movable body operates at a speed at which it can be stopped at any timing, so that it can be safely positioned at the origin position.

It is a front view which looked at the pachinko game machine of embodiment from the front. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the frame for a game machine. (A) is a front view showing a window unit, and (B) is a rear view showing a window unit. (A) is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the front, and (B) is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the window part diagonally from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which looked at the structure of the window part diagonally from the back. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows the tubular part. It is a vertical cross-sectional view which shows the internal structure of the opening / closing frame and the frame for game machines. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the movable body unit of the operation standby mode was seen from diagonally front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which saw the movable body unit of the 1st operation form diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which saw the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form diagonally from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 1st operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from the front. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the operation standby form from the side. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of 1st operation form from the side. It is the schematic which looked at the movable body unit of the 2nd operation form from the side. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation of each movable body and effect LED in a movable body effect. (A) is a schematic view of the light emitting mode of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from the side, and (B) is a schematic view of the light emitting mode of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from above. (A) is a schematic view showing a standby state showing a normal time of the effect display device, (B) is a schematic view showing a first operation state of the effect display device, and (C) shows a second operation state of the effect display device. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic which shows the state which opened the opening and closing frame in the 2nd operation form of a movable body unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the main effect control command which is set to transmit in a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the processing content executed in the command analysis processing. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control main process, and (B) is a flowchart showing an example of the process in S57. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. (A) is a flowchart showing an example of a movable body effect setting process, and (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of a movable body effect in the case of Super Reach A. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. (A) to (F) are explanatory views showing an example of the flow of the composite effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the two-step operation of the 1st movable body of the modification 1. FIG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a determination example of the movable body effect in the case of the modified example 1, the alternative example 1, and the alternative example 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of execution timing of various notices, and (B) and (C) are diagrams showing a determination example of a movable body effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the movable body production at the time of the reach development notice and at the time of the fanning production. It is explanatory drawing which shows that it operates in the arc-shaped path of the 1st movable body of the modification 2A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the swinging motion of the 1st movable body of the modification 2B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the multi-position stop of the 1st movable body of the modification 2C. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 2D, and (B) is a view for explaining a guide hole of a partition plate and the like. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the window part unit of the modification 3. It is a cross-sectional view which shows the window part unit of the modification 4. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a fixed ball passage of the modified example 5, and (B) and (C) are vertical cross-sectional views showing a mobile ball passage of the modified example 5. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 6, (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit, (C) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit as another example, (D). ) Is a side view of (C). It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd transmission body of the modification 7 and the frame for a game machine. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 8, and (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 9. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the tubular body of the modified example 10, and (B) is a diagram showing an example in which the light emitting mode of the tubular body of the modified example 10 is stepwise different. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of the tubular body of the modified example 11, and (B) is a diagram showing an example in which the light emitting mode of the tubular body of the modified example 11 is stepwise different. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 12, and (B) is a front view showing an effect mode of the light guide plate effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body of the modification 13. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the movable body effect execution processing of the modification 14. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the 1st movable body and the 2nd movable body of the modification 14. (A) and (B) are vertical cross-sectional views showing the window unit of the modified example 15. (A) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the window unit of the modified example 16 is located at the first viewing position, and (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a state in which the window unit is moved to the second viewing position. A flowchart showing an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modified example 16, (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of the frame operation effect in the case of super reach B, and (C) is a determination of the movable body effect in the case of super reach B. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko game machine of the modification 17 from the front. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing an operation example of the frame-side movable body of the modified example 17. A flowchart showing an example of the movable body effect setting process of the modified example 17, (B) is a diagram showing a determination example of the frame side movable body effect in the case of super reach B, and (C) is a case of the second operation pattern PTB-2. It is a figure which shows the determination example of the frame side movable body production of. (A) is an explanatory view showing the deformation operation of the first movable body of the modified example 18, and (B) is a front view showing the magnitude relationship between the holes of the first movable body and the second transmissive body shown in (A). Is. It is explanatory drawing which shows the deformation operation of the 1st movable body of the modification 19. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a figure for demonstrating the operation of the upper accessory. It is a figure which shows the hit type table. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the circuit structure in the main board (game control board). It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the jackpot determination table and jackpot type determination table. It is a figure which shows the variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular form. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the upper accessory setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a figure for showing an example of the upper part character production. It is a figure which shows the upper part character production decision table. It is a flowchart which shows the effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for confirmation of actual operation. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation speed example of the operation control at the time of non-detection, the operation control at the time of detection, and the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

(Structure of pachinko gaming machine 1 according to one embodiment of the present invention, etc.)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing a state in which the frame for the game machine is opened. In the following, the front side of FIG. 1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the back side is the back (rear) side, and the vertical and horizontal directions when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front side. It will be explained as a standard. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the player playing the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko game machine (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board 2 (also referred to as a gauge board) having a game board surface 200A on the front side and a game machine for supporting and fixing the game board 2. It is composed of a frame (underframe) 3. The game board 2 is formed with a game area (also referred to as a “game unit”) 10 having a substantially circular shape in front view surrounded by a guide rail 2b. The game area 10 is a region in which a game ball as a game medium is launched from a hit ball launching device (not shown) and hit, and the hit game ball can flow down.

Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with an opening / closing frame 50 provided with a window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10 so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the opening / closing frame 50 provides the game area 10 with the opening / closing frame 50. It can be opened and closed, and when the opening / closing frame 50 is closed, the game area 10 can be seen through the window portion 51. Further, the opening / closing frame 50 is formed in a size capable of covering the entire front surface of the game machine frame 3, and is formed below the window portion 51 by a player or the like in order to launch the game ball toward the game area. A hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) to be operated is provided.

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 9, the game board 2 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material (transmissive member) such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, and methacrylic resin, and is formed in a substantially square shape in front view. Mainly from a board surface plate 200 provided with obstacle nails (not shown), guide rails 2b (see FIG. 3), etc. on the game board surface 200A, and a spacer member 205 integrally attached to the back side of the board surface plate. It is configured in. The game board 2 of the present embodiment is made of a synthetic resin material having translucency, but is not limited to this, and is formed into a substantially square shape in front view by a non-translucent member such as plywood. It may be configured.

A first special symbol display 4A and a second special symbol display 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, a lower right position of the game area 10). These consist of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and the special symbol may be a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. The first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B are special symbols (special identification information) that are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can identify each of them in a special symbol game that is an example of a variable display game. A "special figure") is displayed in a variable manner (also referred to as a variable display or a variable display). The variable display (variable display) of a special symbol is to change (display in a variable manner) a plurality of types of special symbols by an update display or the like (the same applies to other variable displays). At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) as a display result (variable display result). In the following, the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol that is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .. The special figure game of the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game of the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game".

The effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are provided near the center of the game area 10 on the game board 2. The effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y are composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and form a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the effect display device 5A, the variation display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 4A and the variation display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 4B in the special symbol game are supported. (For example, in synchronization with the 1st special figure game and the 2nd special figure game), for example, "left", "middle", and "right" production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, which are multiple variable display units such as three. , 5R, the effect symbol (decorative symbol), which is a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each of them, is variablely displayed (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction or update display). The variable display of this effect symbol is also included in the variable display game.

As described above, in the display area of the effect display device 5A, the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A or the special figure using the second special figure in the second special symbol display 4B In synchronization with the figure game, a plurality of types of effect symbols that can be identified by each are displayed in a variable manner, and a final effect symbol (final stop symbol) that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the display area of the effect display device 5A, the movable bodies (first movable body 300, second movable body 400, third movable body 500L, 500R, and fourth movable body 600L, which will be described later, A specific game information display area 5Z for displaying specific game information related to the game (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) is provided regardless of the position of the 600R). ing. The small symbols are a first small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the first special symbol game and smaller than the effect symbol, and a second small symbol that is variably displayed corresponding to the second special symbol game and is smaller than the effect symbol. included. The small symbol may be one that is always displayed or one that is displayed only for a predetermined period. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not the state is currently in the variable display (variable display). The right-handed display is a display that prompts the player to operate the hitting ball operation handle so that the game ball is launched on the right side of the game area 10. In this embodiment, a part of the display area of the effect display device 5A is set as the specific game information display area 5Z, but at least one of the display areas of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is provided with the specific game information display area 5Z. You may. Further, the game board 2 may be provided with a specific game information display device (for example, LED, lamp, 7-segment LED, liquid crystal display device, etc.).

The width of the display screen of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is substantially half that of the effect display device 5A, and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are provided on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A so as to be movable and rotatable as described later. In the present embodiment, the central effect display device 5A mainly performs variable display of the effect symbol and various effects, and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y perform the effects related to the effect display device 5A. However, the effect display device 5A may be replaced with a variable display of the effect symbol, or an effect separate from the effect display device 5A may be performed.

Further, these effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are arranged on the back side of the game board 2 and can be visually recognized through the opening 2c formed in the game board 2. In the present embodiment, a part of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be visually recognized through the board plate 200. Further, a frame-shaped center decorative frame 52 is provided in the opening 2c of the game board 2.

A first reserved storage display area 5D and a second reserved storage display area 5U are set at two locations on the left and right below the display area of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y. In the first reserved storage display area 5D and the second reserved storage display area 5U, the reserved storage display for identifiablely displaying the reserved storage number (special figure reserved storage number) of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is performed. That is, in the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold storage display area 5U, the hold display image corresponding to the special figure game whose execution is held is displayed.

Here, the holding of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball passes through the first starting winning opening formed by the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the effect symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Will be done.

At the right-side position of the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B, there are a first hold display 25A and a second hold display 25B for identifiable display of the number of special symbol hold storages. It is provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of first special figure hold storage identifiable, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. For example, the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B are each configured to include a plurality of LEDs, and the first special figure hold storage number (the number of hold memories of the first special figure game) depends on the number of LEDs lit. ) And the number of reserved storage of the second special figure (the number of reserved storage of the second special figure game) are displayed.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the effect display device 5A, and a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided below the effect display device 5Y. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The normal variable winning ball device 6B is in a closed state in which it protrudes into the game area 10 and in an open state in which it is retracted from the game area 10 by the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory shown in FIG. It is provided with a normal electric accessory having a variable movable plate, and forms a second start winning opening as a start area (second start area).

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the first start winning opening are detected by the first starting opening switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special drawing If the number of reserved storages is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first start condition is satisfied. Further, based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the second start winning opening are detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second If the number of reserved special figures is not more than a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"), the second start condition is satisfied.

As shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided at a position to the right of the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 forms a large winning opening as a specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door opened and closed by the solenoid 82 shown in FIG. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area is an open state in which the game ball is easy to pass (enter), which is advantageous for the player, and a player who cannot pass (enter) (or is difficult to enter) the game ball. It changes to a closed state that is disadvantageous for.

Based on the fact that the game balls that have passed (entered) the large winning opening are detected by the count switch 23 shown in FIG. 2, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to pass (enter) the game ball through the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball. It becomes a disadvantageous second state.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a position on the right side of the second hold display 25B. As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and performs variable display of ordinary symbols (ordinary symbols, ordinary symbols) which are a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from special symbols. The variable display of the normal pattern is also called a normal figure game (normal figure game). The normal drawing game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the gate switch 21 of FIG. 2 is turned on, whereby the passing of the game ball is detected. At a position on the right side of the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41. That is, the Fuzu hold display 25C displays the number of Fuzu hold storage, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is suspended, by the number of LED lights.

On the surface of the game board 2, a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails are provided. Further, a game area side light emitting component is arranged on the game board 2. Examples of the game area side light emitting component include a light emitting component (LED) not shown in the center decorative frame 52, and a light emitting component (LED) not shown in the ordinary winning ball device 6A and the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. )and so on. Further, the game board 2 may be provided with a light emitting component (LED) for emitting light at least a part of its surface (for example, a light guide region). At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and an effect LED 9 for a game effect is provided around the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area 10, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is supplied to a hitting ball launching device (not shown). An upper plate 90 (also referred to as a ball hitting plate) for holding (storing) the ball is provided. A discharge port (not shown) for discharging excess balls, foul balls, etc. overflowing from the upper plate 90 to the lower plate (not shown) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided at the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3. A push button 31B is provided on the member forming the upper plate. Inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B, a push sensor 35B is provided which detects the player's operation (for example, pressing) on the push button 31B and outputs the operation detection signal to the effect control board 12. There is.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to the lower portion of the frame 3 for the game machine. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit 35A including a tilting direction sensor unit for detecting a tilting operation on the operation stick may be provided inside the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3 in the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilting direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. A pair of) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

Next, the circuit configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as shown in FIG. 2, various types of transmissions are transmitted between the main board 11, the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, the LED control board 14, the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. Various boards such as a relay board 15 for relaying a control signal, a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special drawing game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol 20 and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function. Further, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main board 11 receives detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 that detect the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41. The wiring to be transmitted is connected. In addition, display control of the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, the first hold display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the normal figure hold display 25C, etc. is performed. The wiring that transmits the command signal for this is connected.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a variation pattern designation command indicating a variation pattern indicating a variation mode such as a variation time of the effect symbol, a type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and has a ROM 101 (Read Only Memory 101) that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for game control. RAM 102 (Random Access Memory 102), a CPU 103 (Central Processing Unit 103) that executes a game control program to perform control operations, and a random number circuit that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include 104 and an I / O 105 (Input / Output port 105). As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, various data (data such as fluctuation patterns and various determination tables) stored in the ROM 101 are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory.

The random number circuit 104 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be updated when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program. The I / O 105 includes an input port into which various signals are input and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (game ball passes through) from various switches (gate switch 21) for detecting the game ball, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23). Alternatively, a detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering the game) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit. The effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, and receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 to display the effect. Various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, the speakers 8L, 8R, and the production LED 9 are mounted.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an effect display device. A display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5A, 5X, and 5Y, and a random number circuit 124 that updates numerical data indicating a random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120. , I / O 125 is installed. As an example, the effect control board 12 functions (executes the effect) by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120. At this time, various data (data used for the effect control pattern, various determination tables, and the like) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The display control unit 123 outputs a video signal of the effect image to be displayed on the effect display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and displays the effect image on the effect display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may be equipped with VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), and the like.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used when controlling the effect operation. The effect random number may be updated when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program. The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals.

The voice control board 13 has a function of outputting voice (voice specified by the sound effect signal) from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound effect signal from the effect control board 12. The LED control board 14 has a function of turning on / off the effect LED 9 (turning on / off according to the driving content indicated by the illumination signal) based on the illumination signal from the effect control board 12.

The effect display device 5A includes a display panel such as a liquid crystal panel and a driver circuit for driving the display panel. The video signal supplied from the display control unit 123 to the effect display device 5A via the I / O 125 is input to the driver circuit. The driver circuit displays the image represented by the video signal on the display panel. Further, although the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are different in size from the effect display device 5A and movable as described later, the display configuration is the same as that of the effect display device 5A.

In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R of the effect display device 5A and the effect symbol display areas of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, the effect symbol changes in response to the start of the first or second special symbol game. The display starts. When the variable display result (also referred to as the fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first and second special symbol games, the finalized effect symbol (three effect symbols) becomes the display result (variable display result) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Combination) is displayed as a stop (derivative display).

Next, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the outer frame 60 is formed in a vertically long square frame shape by the upper plate 61, the lower plate 62, the left side plate 63, and the right side plate 64. The upper plate 61 and the lower plate 62 are formed of wood in a plate shape, and can be installed and fixed to a game island (not shown) installed in a game hall or the like via nails or the like. The left side plate 63 and the right side plate 64 are formed in a plate shape by extrusion molding of an aluminum material.

A curtain plate 65 is provided at the lower part of the opening of the outer frame 60, and the lower part of the opening is closed. In the upper left corner and lower left corner of the outer frame 60, bearings (not shown) that rotatably support vertically oriented rotation shafts (not shown) provided in the upper left corner and lower left corner of the gaming machine frame 3 A portion (not shown) is provided, and the gaming machine frame 3 is located between a closing position for closing the opening of the outer frame 60 and an opening position for opening the opening around the left side of the outer frame 60. It is rotatably supported.

The game machine frame 3 is formed with an opening (not shown) having a size into which a back cover 70 (see FIG. 9) for covering various parts and devices provided on the back side of the game board 2 can be inserted. There is. Further, a locking recess (not shown) is provided at the upper and lower positions on the left side of the opening, and a board holding metal fitting (not shown) is provided at the upper and lower positions on the right side. Therefore, the back cover 70 on the back surface of the game board 2 is inserted into the opening from the front of the game machine frame 3, and the right end is inserted into the locking recess (not shown) with the left end of the game board 2 inserted into the opening. The game board 2 can be attached to the game machine frame 3 by locking with a holding metal fitting (not shown). Further, the game board 2 can be easily removed from the game machine frame 3 by releasing the locked state of the board holding metal fittings.

Next, the window unit 51A constituting the window 51 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 9. 4A and 4B are a front view showing a window unit, and FIG. 4B is a rear view showing the window unit. 5A and 5B are a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the front, and FIG. 5B is a perspective view showing a state in which the window unit is viewed diagonally from the rear. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the window unit is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the window unit is viewed from diagonally behind. FIG. 8 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a tubular portion. FIG. 9 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the opening / closing frame and the frame for a game machine.

As shown in FIGS. 4 to 7, the window unit 51A is arranged on the game area 10 side of the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250, and is located at a position corresponding to the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200. It has a second permeator 260 in which a hole 270 is formed.

The first transmissive body 250 has a plate-shaped portion made of a front transmissive plate 251 made of a transparent glass material, and a first tubular body 252 and a second tubular body formed in a tubular shape by a non-translucent synthetic resin material. It is composed of a tubular portion made of a body 253 and a tubular portion. The second tubular body 253 is provided inside the first tubular body 252 so as to be fitted from the opening on the back side, and the front opening of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 is front-transparent. It is formed to be slightly smaller than the plate 251. By inserting the front transmission plate 251 through the opening on the back side of the first tubular body 252 and further fitting the second tubular body 253 from the back side, the front The peripheral edge portion of the transmission plate 251 is sandwiched by the opening peripheral edge portions on the front side of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253.

The first tubular body 252 has a tubular portion and a plate-shaped flange portion 256 formed so as to spread from the rear opening peripheral edge portion of the tubular portion to the periphery. Further, the outer peripheral surface of the first tubular body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular body 253 are plated and reinforced by the plating process.

In the second tubular body 253, screws N1 are attached to a plurality of mounting holes formed in the rear opening peripheral edge portion, and a plurality of the screws N1 are formed in the rear opening peripheral edge portion of the first tubular body 252. By being screwed into the hole, it is integrated with the first tubular body 252 to form a tubular portion, and is sandwiched by the opening peripheral edges on the front side of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253. The front transmission plate 251 is also integrated to form the first transmission body 250. The peripheral edge of the front transmission plate 251 and the peripheral edge of the opening on the front side of each of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are joined via an adhesive or the like.

The first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are formed so that the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion is longer than the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion. As shown in the above, the front transmission plate 251 has a substantially triangular shape in vertical cross-sectional view, and is arranged so as to be inclined downward, that is, the upper end is inclined to the front side.

The above-mentioned upper plate 90 is provided at a position below the window portion 51. Since the upper plate 90 is open at the top and a game ball for playing a game can be thrown in, if the first transmissive body 250 protrudes above the upper plate 90, it interferes with the throwing of the game ball. It ends up. Further, the first transmissive body 250 is provided so as to project forward from the member forming the upper plate 90. Therefore, the front transmission plate 251 is located on the rear side from the upper side to the lower side so that the upper end is located in front of the front end of the member forming the upper plate 90 and the lower end is located on the rear side of the upper plate 90. It is arranged so as to be inclined to.

In the present embodiment, the tubular portion composed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 has an extremely short front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion as compared with the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion. The present invention is not limited to this, and the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion and the lower wall portion may be substantially the same, and the front-rear length dimension of the upper wall portion is the front-rear length dimension of the lower wall portion. It may be shorter than the dimension. Further, it may not be a tubular portion provided along the entire peripheral edge of the front transparent plate 251 but may be an arch-shaped portion along a part of the peripheral edge of the front transparent plate 251.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the convex portions 254A and the concave portions 254B extending in the front-rear direction are provided at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253. A reinforcing structure portion 254 made of the above is formed. Further, the convex portion 255A formed on the inner peripheral surface for forming the screw hole of the screw N1 in the first tubular body 252, and the inner portion for forming the mounting hole for the screw N1 in the second tubular body 253. The convex portion 255A formed on the peripheral surface and the concave portion 255B formed on the outer peripheral surface also function as the reinforcing structure portion 254. By forming the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 in this way, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion to improve the strength. To do.

Further, a decorative portion is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion by the uneven portion and the plating process applied to the outer peripheral surface as described above. In the present embodiment, the decorative portion is provided by the uneven portion for reinforcement and the plating process, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the outer peripheral surface is colored or a pattern is provided. The decorative part may be formed.

The second transmissive body 260 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material such as a transparent acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or a methacrylic resin, and has a plate-like portion composed of a transmissive plate 261 in which a hole 270 is formed and a non-transparent portion. It is composed of a frame body 262 formed in a frame shape by a light synthetic resin material. The rear transmission plate 261 is fixed to the back surface of the frame body 262 via an adhesive or the like so as to close the opening 262A of the frame body 262.

The first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 configured in this way have screws N2 attached from the front side to a plurality of mounting holes formed in the flange portion 256 of the first tubular body 252, and the frame body 262. By screwing into the screw holes formed in the above, the windows are integrated to form one window unit 51A. As shown in FIG. 3, the window unit 51A is attached to the back side of the opening / closing frame 50 at the opening position where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened so as to close the opening (not shown) of the opening / closing frame 50. ..

The window unit 51A is removable from the opening / closing frame 50 and can be replaced when the model is changed. Specifically, in a state where the locking pin projecting from the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 is inserted into the locking hole formed in the frame body 262, the locking hook provided in the frame body 262 is used as the locking pin. It is attached by locking.

When the window unit 51A is attached to the back surface of the opening / closing frame 50 and the opening / closing frame 50 is rotated from the open position to the closed position to close the front surface of the gaming machine frame 3, the rear transmission is transmitted as shown in FIG. The plate 261 is arranged in front of the board surface plate 200 of the game board 2 substantially parallel to the board surface plate 200 with a predetermined gap, and a game ball can flow down between the board surface plate 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. Game area 10 is formed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8, the rear transmissive plate 261 covers the entire game area 10 surrounded by the guide rails 2b on the game board surface 200A of the board surface plate 200 when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front (player side). The hole 270 is arranged at a position corresponding to the opening 2c formed in the board plate 200.

In the present embodiment, the game area 10 is defined as an area where the game ball can flow down, that is, an area of the game board surface 200A of the board plate 200 surrounded by the guide rails 2b, excluding the opening 2c, and the opening 2c. It includes a corresponding area, that is, an area in which the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y and various movable bodies described later are provided so as to be visible to the player (areas shown by diagonal lines in FIG. 8). Further, since the center decorative frame 52 is provided in the opening 2c, the game ball is restricted from flowing into the opening 2c.

Further, in the present embodiment, the hole 270 is provided at a position corresponding to the opening 2c, which is different in shape and smaller than the opening 2c formed in the board plate 200. The invention is not limited to this, and the hole portion 270 may be formed in substantially the same shape, or a part thereof may be located outside the opening 2c.

Therefore, the game area 10 configured in this way is visible (perspective) from the player side in front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the front transparent plate 251 and the rear transparent plate 261 constituting the window portion 51. This is possible (see the window portion 51 shown in the mesh line area in FIG. 4 (A)). As shown in FIG. 9, the rear transmission plate 261 and the game board surface 200A are installed in an upright state so as to be parallel to each other, whereas the front transmission plate 251 gradually inclines backward from the upper side to the lower side. Since the arrangement is performed in a forward leaning posture that is inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, the separation dimension L2 below the separation dimension L1 above the rear transmission plate 261 is shorter than the separation dimension L1. ing.

The first transmissive body 250 composed of the front transmissive plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion constitutes the post-transparent body 260. It is formed in a convex shape that protrudes forward with respect to the plate 261. In a state where the window unit 51A is attached to the opening / closing frame 50, the tubular portion composed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 is formed. It is provided so as to be inserted into the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 from the back surface side and project forward.

Therefore, the rear transmission plate 261 forming the game area 10 together with the game board surface 200A is accommodated within the plate thickness dimension in the front-rear direction of the opening / closing frame 50, while the tubular portion is provided so as to project forward with respect to the front surface of the opening / closing frame 50. As a result, the front transmission plate 251 can be arranged as far forward as possible from the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the front-rear dimension of the opening / closing frame 50. As a result, a wide space S can be formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, the upper wall portions of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are formed so as to incline downward toward the front, and external light from the front upper part of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is transmitted to the gaming area 10. Since it is difficult to enter, the front part of the upper part of the game area 10 is hidden by the upper wall part, but since the player's line of sight is located below the upper wall part, it can be visually recognized by looking up.

Further, in the pachinko game machine 1, for example, a magnet is pressed against the front transmission plate 251 to cause a malfunction of the magnetic sensor to illegally generate a prize, or a game ball flowing down the game area 10 is magnetically driven. There is a possibility that fraudulent acts such as fraudulent guidance will be performed, but by lengthening the separation dimensions L1 and L2 between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261, the thickness of the rear transmission plate 261 is not increased. Since the front transmission plate 251 can be moved away from the game area 10 as much as possible to attenuate the influence of the magnetic force of the magnet, fraudulent acts by the magnet can be suitably suppressed. Further, in a game machine equipped with a magnet sensor that detects illegal magnetism, the above-mentioned fraudulent activity can be performed by lengthening the separation dimension between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 within a range that cannot be detected by the magnet sensor. It is possible to suppress it suitably, and it is possible to reduce the number of magnet sensors arranged.

Next, a movable body unit having the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 18. FIG. 10 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable unit in the operation standby mode is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 11 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable unit of the first operation mode is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing a state in which the movable unit of the second operation mode is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 13 is a schematic view of the movable unit in the operation standby mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 14 is a schematic view of the movable unit of the first operation mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 15 is a schematic view of the movable unit of the second operation mode as viewed from the front. FIG. 16 is a schematic view of the movable unit in the operation standby mode as viewed from the side. FIG. 17 is a schematic view of the movable body unit of the first operation mode as viewed from the side surface. FIG. 18 is a schematic view of the movable body unit of the second operation mode as viewed from the side surface.

In this way, the effect control CPU 120 can execute various game-related effects such as variable display control of the effect symbol and advance notice effect based on the effect control command (control information) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100. Has been done.

As the warning effect to be executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variable display of the effect symbol, for example, a jackpot advance notice effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit, a reach notice suggesting whether or not to reach, and a stop symbol are used. Multiple notices to be executed at the start of fluctuation display or when reach is established, such as a stop symbol notice to be announced and a latent notice to notify whether the game state is a probability fluctuation state (whether or not it is latent). Including.

In the present embodiment, the movable body effect by the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R described below, these movable bodies and the speaker 8L, Various effects such as a combined effect using the 8R and the effect LED 9 and the operation effect executed on condition that the player operates the operating means such as the stick controller 31A can be executed as various notices.

As shown in FIGS. 10 to 18, the movable body unit is provided between the game board 2 and the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y provided on the back side of the game board 2, and the effect display devices 5A, 5X. , 5Y The base member 700 fixed to the back cover 70, and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the third movable body 300, which are movably provided with respect to the base member 700. It has 4 movable bodies 600L and 600R. The base member 700 is formed in a square frame shape by the upper side portion, the left side side portion, the right side portion, and the lower side portion, and each upper side portion, left side portion, right side portion, and lower side portion are each of the display screens of the effect display device 5A. It is arranged along the sides so that the display screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y can be visually recognized through the central opening. This movable body unit can be changed into an operation standby mode, a first motion mode, and a second motion mode as described later.

The first movable body 300 has a slide plate 301 that is movably attached in the front-rear direction along a rail 701 that extends obliquely downward from the upper side of the base member 700, and a rotation shaft 305 at the tip of the slide plate 301. A main body 302 that is rotatably supported by the main body, a first protruding portion 303 and a second protruding portion 304 that are rotatably attached to the main body 302 so as to be able to project and retract, and a first drive mechanism 310 and a second drive mechanism It is mainly composed of 320, a third drive mechanism 330, and a fourth drive mechanism 340 (see FIG. 2).

The first movable body 300 is a first standby position (see FIGS. 13 and 16), which is an origin position arranged on the upper side of the game board 2 by a first drive mechanism 310 including a first drive motor 311 and gears. And the first effect position (see FIGS. 14 and 17) arranged on the center side of the game board 2, and the rail 701 can be moved along the rail 701. The first drive mechanism 310 includes a first standby position sensor and a first effect position sensor that detect the position of the first movable body 300.

Since the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 is attached so as to be movable in the front-rear direction along the rail 701 of the base member 700, the first movable body 300 is attached to the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. It can be accelerated and advanced during the period. That is, the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700 form an acceleration advance means. Further, in order to further enhance the acceleration property, the material and shape may have a lower sliding resistance between the slide plate 301 and the rail 701. Further, a lubricating oil or the like may be applied in order to further reduce the sliding resistance. Further, an acceleration support means (for example, a spring member) (for example, a spring member) (not shown) that supports the acceleration of the first movable body 300 may be provided. For example, the acceleration of the first movable body 300 can be supported by the spring force that tries to return to the natural length from the urged state in which the spring member is contracted to the natural length. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

The main body 302 has a substantially hexahedron, and is fixed to a rotating shaft 305 facing in the left-right direction. Hereinafter, in the main body 302, the surface facing the front in the normal state (operation standby mode) will be referred to as surface A, and the surface facing upward will be referred to as surface B.

The rotation shaft 305 is rotated by a second drive mechanism 320 including a second drive motor, gears, etc. (not shown), and the surface A of the main body 302 faces the front and the surface B faces upward. The moving standby state (see FIGS. 13 and 16), the first rotation state in which the surface A faces diagonally forward and upward and the surface B faces the rear side (see FIGS. 14 and 17), and the surface A diagonally forward. It is possible to switch between the second rotation state (see FIGS. 15 and 18) in which the surface B faces downward on the side and the surface B faces upward on the diagonally front side, and the rotation state of the main body 302. The second drive mechanism 320 includes a rotation standby position sensor, a first rotation position sensor, and a second rotation position sensor that detect the rotation state of the first movable body 300.

The first protruding portion 303 is built in the main body portion 302 by a third drive mechanism 330 including a third drive motor 331, a gear and a rack (not shown), and the like (FIGS. 13, 15, and 16, FIGS. 18) and the first protruding state (see FIGS. 14 and 17) projecting outward from the surface A of the main body 302 can be switched. In the first stored state, the entire first protruding portion 303 is housed in the main body portion 302 so as not to protrude to the outside from the main body portion 302. The third drive mechanism 330 includes a first protrusion position sensor and a first storage position sensor that detect the state of the first protrusion 303.

The second protruding portion 304 is partially incorporated in the main body portion 302 by a fourth drive mechanism 340 including a fourth drive motor 341, a gear and a rack (not shown), and the like (FIGS. 13, 14, and 16). , FIG. 17) and a second protruding state (see FIGS. 15 and 18) projecting outward from the surface B of the main body 302. In the second stored state, a part of the first protruding portion 303 protrudes outward from the surface B of the main body portion 302, but the back surface of the surface B in the rotation standby state or the first rotating state. Since it is placed on the side, it is not noticeable from the player (front side). The fourth drive mechanism 340 includes a second protrusion position sensor and a second storage position sensor that detect the state of the second protrusion 304.

The second movable body 400 is attached to the lower side portion of the base member 700, and is arranged on the lower side of the game board 2 by a fifth drive mechanism 410 including a fifth drive motor, gears, racks, etc. (not shown). 2 Moves in the vertical direction between the standby position (see FIGS. 13, 15, 16, and 18) and the second effect position (see FIGS. 14 and 17) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. It is possible. The second movable body 400 is inclined so that the upper end thereof falls forward at the second effect position. The fifth drive mechanism 410 includes a second standby position sensor and a second effect position sensor that detect the position of the second movable body 400.

The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are attached to both left and right sides of the lower side portion of the base member 700, and are provided by the sixth drive mechanism 510L and 510R including the sixth drive motors 511L and 511R and a rotating arm and gear (not shown). , A third standby position (see FIGS. 13, 15, 16 and 18) arranged on the lower side of the game board 2 and a third effect position (see FIGS. 14 and 14) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. It is possible to move up and down between (see 17) and. Specifically, the rotating arm is adapted to rotate about an axis (not shown) extending in the front-rear direction, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are the second in the second standby position in the third standby position. It is arranged at a position separated from the left and right sides of the movable body 400, and is arranged at a position close to the left and right sides of the second movable body 400 at the second effect position in the third effect position. The third movable bodies 500L and 500R are inclined so that the upper end thereof falls forward at the third effect position. The sixth drive mechanism 510L, 510R includes a third standby position sensor and a third effect position sensor that detect the positions of the third movable bodies 500L, 500R.

The fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are attached to both left and right sides of the upper side portion of the base member 700, and the seventh drive mechanism 610L and 610R including a seventh drive motor, gears, racks and the like (not shown) of the game board 2 It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the fourth standby position (see FIGS. 13 and 14) arranged on the upper side and the fourth effect position (see FIG. 15) arranged on the center side of the game board 2. It has become. Specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move so as to approach each other from the left and right sides of the upper side portion of the base member 700 toward the central portion, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R each move. , At the fourth standby position, they are arranged at positions separated from the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 at the first standby position, and at the fourth effect position, at positions close to the left and right sides of the first movable body 300 at the first effect position. Be placed. The seventh drive mechanism 610L, 610R includes a fourth standby position sensor and a fourth effect position sensor that detect the positions of the fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first standby position (origin position), the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, and the third movable body 500L. , 500R are arranged in the third standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged in the fourth standby position. The first movable body 300 is in the rotation standby state, and the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 303 are arranged. The unit 304 is in the first stored state and the second stored state. At this time, since each movable body is arranged on the peripheral side of the opening 2c of the game board 2, the display screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y can be visually recognized from the player (front side) ( See FIG. 13). For example, as shown in FIG. 1, it can be said that the first standby position (origin position) of the first movable body 300 is a position where the first movable body 300 does not overlap with the effect display device 5A. The first standby position (origin position) of the first movable body 300 is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a position where the first movable body 300 overlaps a part of the effect display device 5A. Further, as shown in FIG. 16, only a part of the front surface side of the first movable body 300 at the first standby position (origin position) is slightly the first transparent body through the hole 270 of the rear transparent plate 261. Although it has entered between 250 and the second transmissive body 260, it may not enter.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second effect position, and the third movable body 500L, The 500R is arranged at the third effect position, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged at the fourth standby position, the first movable body 300 is in the first rotating state, and the first protruding portion 303 is the first. It is in a protruding state, and the second protruding portion 304 is in a second stored state. At this time, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the first protruding portion 303 are arranged on the front side of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y to form a predetermined shape. They coalesce by coming into contact with or close to each other to form an object (see FIG. 14). That is, the effect control CPU 120 can control the first movable body 300 to move the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R so as to be able to be combined after the first control is performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12, in the second operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300 is the first effect position, the second movable body 400 is the second standby position, and the third movable body 500L, The 500R is arranged at the third standby position, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged at the fourth effect position, the first movable body 300 is in the second rotating state, and the first protruding portion 303 is the first. It is in the stored state, and the second protruding portion 304 is in the second protruding state. At this time, the first movable body 300, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, and the second protruding portion 304 are arranged on the front side of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, and a structure having a shape different from that of the first operating mode is formed. They coalesce by contacting or approaching each other to form a structure (see FIG. 15). That is, the effect control CPU 120 can control the first movable body 300 to move the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R so as to be able to be combined after the first control is performed.

Further, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first motion mode, and in the second motion mode, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are the first movable body 300. The second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are arranged on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261 when they are combined with the rear transmission plate 261 (FIG. 17). , See FIG. 18).

Therefore, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are combined, the moving direction of the first movable body 300 in the first control, That is, since they are located at different positions in the front-rear direction, a sense of depth can be created.

Next, an example of operation control of the movable body unit by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 19. FIG. 19 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of each movable body and the effect LED in the movable body effect.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 16, in the operation standby mode of the movable body unit, in the first movable body 300, a part of the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is rearward at the first standby position. It is located on the front transmission plate 251 side, that is, on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261 (particularly, see the solid line portion in FIGS. 13 and 16).

In the movable body effect according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the effect control CPU 120 satisfies the start condition of the movable body effect (for example, an operation means during execution of the movable body effect (for example, an effect button or a stick). When the operation of the operation means is detected during the operation acceptance period of the controller 31A, etc., or when the operation valid period ends and the execution timing of the movable body comes, etc.), the first movable body 300, the second movable body, etc. The 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are operated. The effect LED 9 performs a light emission effect according to the first light emission mode.

Specifically, the first movable body 300 is moved diagonally downward from the first standby position to the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIGS. 13 and 16). As shown in the virtual line portions of FIGS. 13 and 16, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is rearward. The front transmission plate 251 is located closer to the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270 of the transmission plate 261, and the main body 302 is arranged forward than the first standby position. That is, in the effect control CPU 120, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. It is possible to execute the first control of moving the front transmission plate 251 to the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261. Further, the second movable body 400 moves toward the second effect position, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R move toward the third effect position.

When the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R move to predetermined positions, they are detected by a first effect position sensor, a second effect position sensor, and a third effect position sensor (not shown). The effect control CPU 120 causes the first movable body 300 to be in the first rotation state based on the detection of each movable body by the first effect position sensor, the second effect position sensor, and the third effect position sensor. The rotation shaft 305 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the right side (see the first rotation, arrow 2 in FIGS. 14 and 17). The effect control CPU 120 stops the first rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the first rotation position sensor. At this time, the front end side of the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R is tilted forward (see arrow 3 in FIGS. 14 and 17), and the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third Movable bodies 500L and 500R are united. Even when rotating, the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. There is.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light in the second light emitting mode, and the surface A of the main body 302 is detected until the first protrusion 303 is detected by the first protrusion position sensor by the third drive mechanism 330. It is set to the first protruding state by protruding outward from the. As described above, in the first rotating state of the first movable body 300, the surface A of the main body 302 faces diagonally forward and upward, so that the first protruding portion 303 projects diagonally forward and upward. (See arrow 4 in FIGS. 14 and 17). That is, the first protruding portion 303 moves in a direction intersecting the moving direction (oblique downward direction) of the main body portion 302. That is, after executing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, in the first control. It is possible to execute the second control of moving in the direction intersecting the moving direction (front lower direction) (front upper direction). By executing these first control and second control, the movable body unit changes to the first operation mode.

As described above, in the first movable body 300, after the main body portion 302 moves diagonally forward and downward, the first protruding portion 303 is a space portion S formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since it projects diagonally forward and upward, the moving operation of the first projecting portion 303 can be preferably shown without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. Further, even when the operation mode is changed to the first operation mode or the second operation mode, the front transmission plate 251 is not contacted.

Further, in the first operation mode in which the predetermined portion on the front side of the main body portion 302 is located in the space portion S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state. As shown in FIG. 14, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first protruding portion 303 moves so as to spread around the main body portion 302, that is, by projecting, a part of the main body portion 302 expands. Since the first movable body 300 seems to be expanded, it is possible to give an impact to the player.

Further, even after the first protruding portion 303 is changed to the first protruding state so as to spread around the main body portion 302, the first protruding portion 303 corresponds to the hole portion 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it does not protrude out of the area to be played, that is, it does not protrude to the game area 10 side of the game ball, the first protruding portion 303 does not hinder the visibility of the game ball.

Further, in the first operation mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the first protruding portion 303 form a structure having a predetermined shape. To do. Specifically, the second movable body 400 is arranged below the first movable body 300 so as to be in contact with or close to the first movable body 300, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are in contact with or adjacent to the left and right sides of the first movable body 300. By arranging them so as to be close to each other, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R serve as supporting means for the first movable body 300 and support each other, so that the protruding operation of the first protruding portion 303 And the shaking of the first movable body 300 after the protruding operation is suppressed, and the posture can be stabilized.

Further, most of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are arranged on the game area 10 side (back side) of the rear transmission plate 261 when combined with the first movable body 300. , It is possible to give a sense of depth to the structure formed by coalescing.

Further, since the brightness of the second light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 is lower than that of the first light emitting mode, when the movable body unit is in the first operation mode (during the second control), the light of the effect LED 9 is used. It is possible to suppress a decrease in visibility of the movable body.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first protruding portion 303 until it is detected by the first storage position sensor based on the elapse of a predetermined time in the state of the first operation mode of the movable body unit. 1 In the stored state, the second movable body 400 is moved to the second standby position and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are moved to the third standby position until detected by the second standby position sensor and the third standby position sensor. (See arrow 5 in FIGS. 15 and 18). Next, after the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R reach positions that do not interfere with the rotational movement of the first movable body 300, the first movable body 300 is rotated so as to be in the second rotating state. The moving shaft 305 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the right side (second rotation, see arrows 6 in FIGS. 15 and 18), and the effect LED 9 is made to emit light in the third light emitting mode. The effect control CPU 120 stops the second rotation of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the first movable body 300 by the second rotation position sensor.

Then, the second projecting portion 304 is projected until it is detected by the second projecting position sensor to bring it into the second projecting state (see arrows 7 in FIGS. 15 and 18), and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are described. It is moved toward the fourth effect position until it is detected by the fourth effect position sensor (see arrow 7 in FIGS. 15 and 18). That is, after executing the first control, the effect control CPU 120 controls the second protruding portion 304, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, in the first control. It is possible to execute the second control of moving in the direction intersecting the moving direction (front lower direction) (front upper direction). By executing these first control and second control, the movable body unit changes to the second operation mode. At this time, the effect LED 9 is made to emit light according to the fourth light emitting mode.

Further, in the second operation mode in which the predetermined portion on the front side of the main body portion 302 is located in the space portion S on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the second protruding portion 304 is changed to the second protruding state. As shown in FIG. 15, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the second protruding portion 304 moves so as to spread around the main body portion 302, that is, by projecting, a part of the main body portion 302 expands. Since the first movable body 300 seems to be expanded, it is possible to give an impact to the player.

Further, even after the second protruding portion 304 is changed to the second protruding state so as to spread around the main body portion 302, the second protruding portion 304 corresponds to the hole portion 270 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since it does not protrude to the outside of the region where the game ball is formed, that is, it does not protrude into the flow-down region of the game ball, the first protruding portion 303 does not hinder the visibility of the game ball.

In the second operating mode of the movable body unit, the first movable body 300, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R and the second protruding portion 304 are united so as to form a structure having a shape different from that of the first operating mode. To do. Specifically, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged so as to be in contact with or close to each other on the left and right sides of the first movable body 300, so that the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are supporting means for the first movable body 300. Since they support each other, the protruding motion of the second protruding portion 304 and the shaking of the first movable body 300 after the protruding motion are suppressed, and the posture can be stabilized.

Further, most of the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are arranged on the game area 10 side (back side) of the rear transmission plate 261 when they are combined with the first movable body 300, so that they are combined. It is possible to give a sense of depth to the structure (see FIG. 12).

Further, since the fourth light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 has a lower brightness than the first light emitting mode and the third light emitting mode, the movable body unit is used for the effect when the movable body unit is in the second operation mode (during the second control). The light of the LED 9 can suppress the deterioration of the visibility of each movable body.

When the effect operation by each movable body is completed after the second operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, the effect control CPU 120 moves the second protrusion 304 until it is detected by the second storage position sensor. The first movable body 300 is set to the first standby position, and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are set to the fourth standby position until they are detected by the first standby position sensor and the fourth standby position sensor. Move toward (storage operation). At this time, the effect LED 9 is made to emit light according to the fifth light emitting mode. When the first movable body 300 moves to the first standby position and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R move to the fourth standby position, the movable body effect by the movable body unit is completed.

It should be noted that the first to fifth light emitting modes by the effect LED 9 may be different depending on various operating modes of the movable body. The light emitting mode includes, for example, the color to be emitted, the brightness, lighting or blinking, the blinking speed, and the like.

Next, the effect of the effect of the effect LED 9 and the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR in the light emission effect will be described with reference to FIG. 20A and 20B are a schematic view of the light emitting mode of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from the side, and FIG. 20B is a schematic view of the light emitting mode of the effect LED and the movable body LED as viewed from above. ..

As shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the effect LED 9 arranged around the first transmissive body 250 on the front surface of the opening / closing frame 50 irradiates light toward the first transmissive body 250. Since the outer peripheral surface of the first transmissive body 250 (first tubular body 252) is plated, the light from the effect LED 9 is reflected and does not enter the first transmissive body 250. ing. Further, the ambient external light R other than the light from the effect LED 9 (for example, the light such as the indoor light of the game store or the light from the adjacent game machine) is also prevented from entering the first transmitter 250. It has become.

That is, it is possible to prevent the visibility of each movable body and the game area 10 from being lowered, and it is possible to prevent the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, and 350DR from affecting the light emitting effect. Further, by irradiating the periphery of the first transmissive body 250, it is possible to make it stand out so as to surround the periphery of each movable body, and not only the player playing the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also the surroundings. You can appeal the production.

Further, the movable body LEDs include a movable body LED 350A attached to the main body portion 302 facing the front side (player side), a movable body LED 350B attached to the second protruding portion 304, and movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR facing the side surface side. The light is directed to the back side (game area 10 side) and consists of movable LEDs 350DL and 350DR (light emitting means). The light from the movable bodies LEDs 350A and 350B to the front side is irradiated to the front side through the front transmission plate 251 and the light to the back side by the movable body LEDs 350DL and 350DR is the game area 10 (the game ball flowing down the game area 10). It is designed to irradiate the winning opening, guidance passage, etc.). The light to the side surfaces of the movable bodies LEDs 350CL and 350CR is emitted toward the first transmitting body 250, but the inner peripheral surface of the first transmitting body 250 (second tubular body 253) is plated. Therefore, the light of the movable body LEDs 350CL and 350CR is reflected to the front side. That is, it is possible to collect light on the front side to enhance the effect of the effect, and it is possible to prevent the effect of the effect LED 9 from affecting the light emission effect.

Next, an example of the display device effect in the effect display devices 5X and 5Y will be described with reference to FIG. 21A and 21B are schematic views showing a standby state showing a normal state of the effect display device, FIG. 21B is a schematic view showing a first operation state of the effect display device, and FIG. 21C is a second diagram of the effect display device. It is the schematic which shows the operating state.

As shown in FIG. 21A, in the normal state of the effect display device, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are in a standby state in which they are arranged on the left and right sides of the effect display device 5A. In this standby state, the standby state is arranged in a slightly inclined state so that the display unit faces the center side.

Rail members (guidance means) (not shown) for guiding the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged above and below the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, respectively. This rail member is composed of a portion extending in the front-rear direction at a position on the front side of the effect display device 5A and a portion extending in a direction away from both ends of the front-rear portion in the left-right direction, and the effect display device 5X, 5Y. Is rotatably attached to the rail member about a rotation axis in the vertical direction. As described above, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are movably and rotatably provided by the display device drive mechanism 900 including a rail member, a drive motor, and the like (not shown).

When the predetermined start condition of the display device effect is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y so as to approach the position on the front side of the effect display device 5A, as shown in FIG. 21 (B). After that, the rear transmission plate 261 is moved from the position on the back side to the position on the front side through the hole 270 to change the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the first operating state. That is, the effect control CPU 120 passes the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in the standby state at the position on the back side of the rear transmission plate 261, and the predetermined portions of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y pass through the holes 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. It is possible to execute the third control of moving the front transmission plate 251 to the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Since the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the position on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 while the display unit is slightly tilted so as to face the center side, the display unit is easily visible to the player. The movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be preferably shown while maintaining the state.

When the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the position on the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261, the effect control CPU 120 separates the effect display devices 5X and 5Y from each other as shown in FIG. 21 (C). In addition to moving in the direction, a rotation motor (not shown) rotates the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y so as to face the outside in the left-right direction. That is, after executing the third control, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the fourth control of moving in the direction (left-right direction) intersecting the moving direction (front-back direction) in the third control. By executing these the third control and the fourth control, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y change to the second operating state.

Further, since the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y face outward in the left-right direction in the second operating state, the display contents of the display unit can be visually recognized by other than the player. The rail member that guides the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is used when the standby state changes to the first operating state and when the effect display device 5X, 5Y changes from the first operating state to the second operating state. Since it functions as a contact prevention means for preventing contact between the 5Y and the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the effect display devices 5X, 5Y or the rear transmission plate 261 from being damaged.

Next, the relationship between the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic view showing a state in which the opening / closing frame is opened in the second operation mode of the movable body unit.

As shown in FIG. 22, the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 is formed larger than the first movable body 300. More specifically, when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed, the hole 270 also rotates around the hinge portion (rotation axis in the vertical direction) of the opening / closing frame 50. The first movable body 300 in the second operating mode of the movable body unit is the most protruding movable body in each operating mode of the movable body unit, and is a front portion of the first movable body 300 (closed state of the opening / closing frame 50). The portion arranged on the front transmission plate 251 side of the hole portion 270) is arranged in the rotation region Z of the hole portion 270.

Therefore, even if the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed, the rear transmission plate 261 does not come into contact with the first movable body 300. According to this, for example, when an operation error or the like occurs during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control or the second control, and it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance. Even if there is, since the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to prevent the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 from being damaged.

(Progress of games, progress of production, etc.)
Next, the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be schematically described. When the player rotates the hitting operation handle of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area 10. Based on the fact that the game ball that has flowed down the game area 10 has passed through the passage gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. After starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, if the predetermined time that becomes the normal symbol fluctuation time elapses and the normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, the fluctuation display result of the normal symbol is "out of normal symbol". Become. If a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol", and the open control for retracting the movable plate of the normal variable winning ball device 6B from the game area 10 is performed. Then, when a predetermined time elapses, the normal opening control is performed to return to the closed position protruding into the game area 10. When the normal figure game cannot be started, such as during the following open control in which another normal figure game is already executed, the execution of the normal figure game is suspended up to four or the like. The pending Fuzu game will start when it becomes available to start.

Based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state is completed, after the first start condition is satisfied because the game ball has won the first start winning opening. , The special symbol game by the first special symbol display 4A is started. In addition, after the second start condition is satisfied due to the game ball winning the second start winning opening, for example, the second start condition is satisfied due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state. Based on this, the special symbol game by the second special symbol display 4B is started. When the special figure game cannot be started (when the start condition is not satisfied), such as when another special figure game is already executed or when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described later, four or the like are used. The execution of the special figure game is suspended up to the upper limit. The reserved special figure game is executed when the start condition is satisfied.

In the special symbol game, after the variable display of the special symbol is started, the confirmed special symbol (special symbol display result) is derived and displayed when the variable display time elapses. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, a special symbol such as "3" or "7") is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "big hit" as a specific display result, and a special symbol (loss) different from the jackpot symbol. If a symbol (for example, a special symbol such as "-") is stopped and displayed, it is "missing". After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes a "big hit", the game is controlled to a big hit game state as a specific game state in which a round (also referred to as a "round game") advantageous to the player is executed a predetermined number of times. The jackpot game state is an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. When the variable display result in the special figure game is "missing", it is not controlled to the jackpot game state.

In the big hit game state, the big winning door of the special variable winning ball device 7 is a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls. The big prize opening will be open until the occurrence of. As a result, a round is executed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is set to the first state (open state) which is advantageous for the player.

The large winning opening door that opens the large winning opening during the execution of the round catches the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2, and then closes the large winning opening, thereby causing a special variable winning ball device. 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. The round, which is the opening cycle of the big winning opening, is repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "16") (the big winning opening is closed during the period other than the round game).

In the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the effect display device 5A, the variable display of the effect symbol is started in response to the start of the special figure game. Then, in the period from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol to the end of the variable display, the variable display state of the effect symbol may be in a predetermined reach state. The reach state refers to an effect symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y constitutes a part of the jackpot combination. It is a display state in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display state in which all or a part of the effect symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination.

In the embodiment, the reach effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach mode during the variable display. As the reach effect, normal reach, super reach A (developed from normal reach), and super reach B (developed from normal reach), which have different production modes, are prepared. In the embodiment, the jackpot expectation is higher in the order of Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach (normal reach that does not develop into Super Reach). The jackpot expectation level is, for example, the ratio at which the variable display result of the special figure game becomes a "big hit", and here, the ratio at which the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol becomes a "big hit".

When the variable display result of the special figure game is "big hit", a predetermined big hit combination is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol in the display area of the effect display device 5A or the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. The finalized effect symbol is derived and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol is a "big hit"). As an example, the same production symbol (for example, "7" at the time of probability variation jackpot, non-probability variation jackpot) on a predetermined effective line in the production symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". At the time of, "6" etc.) are all displayed as a stop. In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23 (B) described later, the “non-probability change” includes a non-probability change jackpot in which a promotion effect (failure) is executed during the jackpot and a non-probability change jackpot in which the promotion effect itself is not executed. There are two types of "probability change": the probability change jackpot in which the promotion effect (success) is executed during the jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot in which the promotion effect itself is not executed. The promotion effect is a probabilistic promotion effect, which is executed in a predetermined round (for example, 7 rounds) during the jackpot and indicates that the promotion to the probabilistic jackpot was successful or unsuccessful. When the jackpot type is "non-probability change (promotion effect failure)", the same effect symbols "6" are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change promotion effect (failure) is executed in the 7 rounds during the jackpot. When the jackpot type is "probability change (successful promotion effect)", the same effect symbols "6" are all stopped and displayed, and the probability change promotion effect (success) is executed in the 7 rounds during the jackpot. The probabilistic promotion effect may be executed in a round other than the 7 rounds, a plurality of rounds, a fanfare effect, an ending effect, or the like. Further, the promotion effect may be a round promotion effect that notifies the continuation of the round.

When the variable display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the effect symbol is not changed to the reach mode, and the final effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed as the display result of the variable display of the effect symbol. Alternatively, after the variable display mode of the effect symbol becomes the reach mode, the final effect symbol of a predetermined reach combination (reach loss combination) that is not a jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed as a display result of the variable display of the effect symbol.

As a definite special symbol in the special symbol game, among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined normal jackpot combination (also referred to as "non-probability variable jackpot combination") is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "non-probable variable jackpot". When it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit game state, and after the end, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed. By performing the time reduction control, the fluctuation display time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special symbol in the special figure game is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving control, so-called electric chew support is implemented in which the winning frequency of the normal symbol is increased and the winning frequency of the normal variable winning ball device 6B is increased. Therefore, the state in which the time reduction control is performed (time reduction state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the time saving control, one of the conditions that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) after the end of the big hit game state and that the variable display result becomes "big hit" is satisfied first. Sometimes you just have to quit.

As a definite special symbol in the special figure game, among a plurality of types of jackpot combinations, a definite effect symbol that is a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination (also referred to as "probability variation jackpot combination") is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "probability variation jackpot". When it becomes, it is controlled to the big hit game state, and after the end, the probability fluctuation control (probability variation control) is performed together with the time saving control. By performing this probability variation control, the probability that the variation display result becomes a "big hit" in each special figure game is improved so as to be higher than in the normal state. Therefore, the state in which the probability change control is performed (probability change state) is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state. In the probability variation control, when the condition that the fluctuation display result becomes "big hit" and the game is controlled to the big hit game state again after the end of the big hit game state is satisfied, a predetermined number of times (for example, 100, which is the same as the time reduction number) after the end of the big hit game state is satisfied. When the special figure game of (times) is executed, it is decided that "there is a probability change fall" to end the probability change control by the probability change fall lottery that is executed every time the special figure game is started after the end of the jackpot game state. When, etc., it should end.

When the time reduction control is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal diagram game is made shorter than that in the normal state, and the variation display result of the normal symbol in each normal diagram game is "normal diagram". Control to improve the probability of "hit" compared to the normal state, and the movement control time to control the movement of the movable plate in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the fact that the variation display result is "hit" There is a possibility that the second starting condition will be satisfied by making it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second starting winning opening, such as control to make it longer than in the state and control to increase the number of movements compared to the normal state. Controls that are advantageous to the player (electric chew support control, high open control) are performed by increasing the value. This makes it easier to establish the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure, and the special figure game can be executed frequently, so that the variable display result is "big hit" next. The time until becomes is shortened.

The normal state is a game state other than an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state, a time saving state, or a probability change state, which is advantageous for the player. For example, the variable display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure". The probability of "hit" and the probability of the variable display result in the special figure game becoming "big hit" are the initial setting states of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return process is performed after the power is turned on. It is a state that is controlled in the same way as (when) is not executed.

The time saving state is also called "high base", the gaming state that is not the time saving state is called "low base" and "non-time saving state", and the probability variation state is also called "high accuracy". The gaming state that is not a probabilistic state is also called "low probability" or "non-probability change". The gaming state in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is also called "high probability high base". The gaming state when the probability is changed but the time is not shortened is also called "high probability and low base". The game state when the time is shortened although it is not in the probability change state is also called "low probability high base". The normal state is also called "low accuracy low base".

Next, the main operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like. In each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be performed.

(Main operation of main board 11)
On the main board 11, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing is performed every time a timer interrupt is generated by an interrupt request signal from the CTC (counter / timer circuit) supplied every predetermined period (for example, 2 milliseconds), that is, at the interrupt request signal supply interval. It is executed every predetermined time (2 ms). In the game control timer interrupt processing, the CPU 103 executes switch processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like, and the game control timer interrupt processing is repeatedly executed for each timer interrupt. By doing so, control of the game and the like are realized.

In the switch processing, each switch determines whether or not detection signals have been input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. Whether or not it is turned on (that is, whether or not the game ball has entered or passed) is determined for each switch. The result of this determination is used in special symbol process processing and ordinary symbol process processing.

The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. The special symbol process process is a process for realizing the hold and execution of the special symbol game, the jackpot game state, and the like based on the determination result in the switch process and the like. The normal symbol process processing realizes the hold and execution of the normal figure game, the open state of the normal variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning opening) at the time of hitting the normal figure, etc. based on the judgment result in the switch processing. It is a process to do. The command control process is a process of actually transmitting the effect control command set for transmission in the special symbol process process or the like from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12.

(Effect control command that is set to be transmitted in the special symbol process process)
Next, an effect control command that is set to be transmitted by the special symbol process process and transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described. FIG. 23 (A) shows an example of main effect control commands. The following "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number.

Fluctuation pattern designation command 81XX (H), display result designation command 8CXX (H), symbol confirmation designation command 8F00 (H), hit start designation command A000 (H), hit end designation command A300 (H), first start winning designation A command B100 (H), a second start prize designation command B200 (H), and a large prize opening prize designation command B300 (H) are prepared in advance. "XX" is EXT data. A numerical value corresponding to the variable display result is set in "XX" of the display result specification command 8CXX (H) (for example, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), "00" for "loss" and "non-probability change". "01" for "big hit", "02" for "non-probable change big hit (probability production failure)", "03" for "probable change big hit", "04" for "probable change big hit (probability production success)", etc.).

(Special symbol process processing)
FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. Each flag, each counter, and each timer described below are provided in the RAM 102. In the special symbol process process, the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process (S101). For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the first start port switch 22A is on (whether it is determined to be on by the switch processing. The same applies to the other switches). When it is on, it is determined whether the number of reserved first special figures has reached the upper limit (for example, 4), and if it has not reached the upper limit, it is assumed that the first start winning has occurred and the random number circuit From 104 or the game random number updated by the game random number update process, the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result (variable display result of the special game), the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination The random number value MR3 for use is extracted, and the extracted numerical value is held in the first special figure holding storage unit of the RAM 102 as the first holding data. It is determined whether the second start port switch 22B is on. When it is on, it is determined whether the number of reserved second special figures has reached the upper limit (for example, 4), and when it has not reached the upper limit, it is assumed that the second start winning prize has occurred. Similarly, the random number values MR1 to MR3 are extracted, and the extracted numerical values are held in the second special figure holding storage unit of the RAM 102 as the second holding data. The first hold data and the second hold data are held in the starting winning order. The first special figure reserved storage number and the second special figure reserved storage number may be specified by the number of the first reserved data and the second reserved data, and a counter that counts each stored number (hereinafter, the same applies). In the start winning judgment process, when the first start winning is given, the transmission setting of the first starting winning designation command and the addition designation command of the first special figure reserved memory number is performed, and when the second start winning is given. , The transmission setting of the second start prize designation command and the addition designation command of the second special figure reserved memory number is performed.

After executing S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag. The following time saving flag is a flag that is turned on in the time saving state, and the probability change flag is a flag that is turned on in the probability change state.

The special symbol normal processing of S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". For example, when the second special figure hold storage number is not "0", the CPU 103 performs a process for executing the second special figure game, updates the value of the special figure process flag to "1", and performs this process. finish. When the second special figure holding memory number is "0" and the first special figure holding storage number is not "0", the process for executing the first special figure game is performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is set to "1". Is updated to "" to end this process. When both are "0", this process is terminated.

In the process for executing the second special figure game, the oldest second hold data among the second hold data (random values MR1 to MR3) held in the second special figure hold storage unit is held in the second special figure hold. Read from the storage unit to a predetermined buffer of the RAM 102. The read second hold data is deleted from the second special figure hold storage unit. Then, among the second reserved data read into the predetermined buffer, the second special figure to be executed this time is based on the random number value MR1 and the jackpot determination table (stored in ROM 101. The same applies to the determination table below). Determine the variable display result (“big hit” or “miss”) of the game. The decision rate for "big hit" is higher in the probabilistic state (when the probabilistic flag is on) than in the non-probability state (when the probabilistic flag is off). When "big hit" is determined, the big hit type ("probability variation" or "non-probability variation") is determined based on the random number value MR2 and the jackpot type determination table. In the embodiment, one of "non-probability change", "non-probability change (probability of promotion production)", "probability change", and "probability change (success of promotion production)" is determined. The decision result and the information to execute the second special figure game are held in the RAM 102 and are referred to as appropriate (the same applies to other decisions and the like).

In the process for executing the first special figure game, the same process as the process for executing the second special figure game is performed, the first reserved data is read into a predetermined buffer, and the first special figure game is variable. Determine the display result (including determining the jackpot type).

The variation pattern setting process of S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. For example, the CPU 103 determines (selects) a fluctuation pattern and sets the execution start of the first special figure game or the second special figure game. The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the variable display (special figure variation time) and the variable display pattern of the effect symbol.

In the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, there are PA1-1, PA2-1, PA3-2-PA3-4 as the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss. As a jackpot fluctuation pattern, there are PB3-2 to PB3-4. PA1-1 and PA2-1 specify non-reach. PA2-1 is a pattern for shortening the time (with shortening) in which the special figure variation time (execution period of the special figure game) is shorter than the normal (PA1-1). PA3-2 and PB3-2 specify the execution of normal reach (no development to super reach), PA3-3 and PB3-3 specify the execution of super reach A (development from normal reach), and PA3 -4, PB3-4 specify the execution of Super Reach B (developed from Normal Reach).

When the variable display result this time is "big hit", the CPU 103 PB3-2-2 based on the random number value MR3 of the first and second reserved data read into the predetermined buffer and the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hit. Any of PB3-4 is determined as the fluctuation pattern of this time. When the variable display result is "missing" and in the non-time saving state (when the time saving flag is off), PA1-1 and PA3 are based on the random number value MR3 and the fluctuation pattern determination table for the first loss. Any one of -2 to PA3-4 is determined as the current fluctuation pattern. When the variable display result is "missing" and in the time saving state (when the time saving flag is on), PA2-1 and PA3- based on the random number value MR3 and the fluctuation pattern determination table for the second loss. Any of 2 to PA3-4 is determined as the fluctuation pattern of this time. The rate of determination of the fluctuation pattern is higher in the order of PA1-1 or PA2-1> PA3-2> PA3-3> PA3-4 at the time of loss. At the time of big hit, it is higher in the order of PB3-4> PB3-3> PB3-2. Therefore, the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach.

After determining the variation pattern, for example, the drive signal is started to be supplied to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, and the execution of the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game is started. Display result specification command, 1st or 2nd special figure hold storage subtraction specification command, variation pattern specification command that specifies the above decision result and the current game state (can be specified by the state of the probability change flag and the time reduction flag) After setting the transmission of the above and setting the value of the special figure process flag to "2", this process ends.

The special symbol variation process of S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". For example, in the CPU 103, the elapsed time since the start of the special figure game (may be measured by a timer or the like. The same applies to other elapsed times) has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the current fluctuation pattern. (Whether it is the derivation timing of the variable display result) is determined, and if it is not reached, the drive signal for executing the first special figure game or the second special figure game is sent to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol. This process ends after the process of supplying to the display 4B to change the special symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the special symbol fluctuation time is reached, a predetermined drive signal is supplied to the first special symbol display 4A or the second special symbol display 4B, and the symbol of the current variable display result (in the case of "missing", "" -"," 7 "for" probability variation jackpot "," 3 "for non-probability variation jackpot", etc.) are stopped and displayed (derivative display), and the transmission setting of the symbol confirmation specification command is set, and the special figure process flag Update the value of to "3". Execution of the special figure game is realized by repeatedly executing S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs.

The special symbol stop processing of S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". For example, when the variable display result this time is a "big hit", the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag and the probability change flag to off. After that, the transmission setting of the hit start designation command is set, the special figure process flag is updated to "4", and this process is terminated. When the time is shortened due to "loss", it is determined whether the variable display of a predetermined number of times that can be executed in the time saving state is executed (for example, it may be counted by a counter or the like), and the variable display of a predetermined number of times is executed. If so, the time saving flag is reset to off, the value of the special figure process flag is set to "0", and this process is terminated. Even if the variable display of a predetermined number of times has not been executed due to "loss" and the time is not shortened, this process is terminated by setting the value of the special figure process flag to "0".

The jackpot opening preprocessing of S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". For example, it is determined whether the elapsed time since the transmission setting of the hit start designation command has reached the preset fanfare waiting time (waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit game state). If it has not been reached, the jackpot opening preprocessing is terminated. When the fanfare waiting time is reached, the special figure process flag is updated to "5" by performing processing such as opening the large winning opening (supplying a solenoid drive signal) in order to start the round game. By repeating S114 each time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big winning opening, and the like are realized.

The process during opening of the jackpot in S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. For example, the CPU 103 determines whether it is time to end the round game. After the number of times the count switch 23 is turned on (the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) reaches a predetermined value (for example, "9") (it may be counted by a counter or the like), or after the round game is started ( When the elapsed time (after opening the large winning opening) reaches the upper limit period of the round game (for example, 29 seconds) and it is time to end the round game, the large winning opening is returned to the closed state. A process of ending the round game (a process of turning off the solenoid 82) and the like are performed. At this time, when the finished round game is the last round game (for example, the 15th round) (it may be counted by a counter or the like), a setting is made to send a hit end designation command, and the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7" and this process ends. If it is not the last round game, the special figure process flag is updated to "6" and this process ends. If it is not the timing to end the round game, the main process is terminated as it is (the process of keeping the large winning opening open may be performed). By repeating S115 each time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the large winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the large winning opening to the closed state, and finally the large winning opening is closed.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". For example, the CPU 103 determines whether the elapsed time from the end of the round game (after closing the large winning opening) has reached a predetermined closing time (interval period of the round game), and if not. The closed state is maintained, and this process is completed. When the predetermined closing time is reached, in order to start the round game, a process of opening the large winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and this process is terminated.

Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 each time a timer interrupt occurs after the big winning opening is opened in S114.

The jackpot end processing of S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". For example, the elapsed time from the end of the last round game (after closing the big winning opening) is the predetermined ending waiting time (waiting time from the start to the end of the ending in the big hit game state). It is determined whether or not it has been reached, and if it has not been reached, this process is terminated. When the ending waiting time is reached, the ending ends, so when the jackpot type this time is "probability change", turn on the time saving flag and probability change flag, and when it is "non-probability change", turn on the time saving flag and change the probability change. Leave the flag off. Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and this process is terminated.

(Operation of production control board 12)
FIG. 27A is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120 of the effect control board 12. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 120 starts executing the main process. In the main process, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, initial setting of the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 2 ms) of the effect control, and the like (S51). After that, the process shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S52). When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt flag is set in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (on) in the main process, the flag is cleared (S53) and the following process is executed.

The effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: S54). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in the buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, which command (see FIG. 3) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed, and settings and controls corresponding to the analysis result are performed.

Next, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect control process process (S55). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from each process according to the control state, and the display and operation control of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y are executed. .. Next, the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating an effect random number such as a big hit symbol determination random number (S56).

Next, when an abnormality or an error has occurred, the effect control CPU 120 executes a notification control process for executing an abnormality notification (S57), and then shifts to S52. As shown in FIG. 27B, in the notification control process, for example, it is determined whether or not a door opening detection switch (not shown) capable of detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is on (S61). For example, a door opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11. Based on the fact that the opening / closing frame 50 is detected by the door opening detection switch, the main board 11 transmits a door opening designation command indicating that the opening / closing frame 50 has been opened to the effect control board 12. Therefore, when the door opening designation command from the main board 11 is received, it can be determined that the door opening detection switch is on.

If the door open detection switch is on (S61; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first movable body 300 is operating (S62). For example, if the first movable body 300 is at the origin position, it is determined that it is not in operation, and if it is not at the origin position, it is determined that it is in operation. If the first movable body 300 is in operation (S62; Yes), the door opening notification (first opening notification) when the movable body is operating is executed (S63). On the other hand, if the first movable body 300 is not in operation (S62; No), the normal door opening notification (second opening notification) is executed (S65). The door opening notification during the operation of the movable body has a different mode from the door opening notification during the normal operation. For example, the door opening notification during the operation of the movable body has a mode in which the notification sound is louder or the notification image and the notification light emission are conspicuous as compared with the door opening notification during the normal operation. In addition, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating may display a notification image indicating that the moving object is in operation (for example, "moving object is in operation!" Or "be careful of the moving moving object!". It has (such as outputting the contents by voice), and the door opening notification at the normal time may not have that effect.

In this way, the first opening notification can notify that the opening / closing frame 50 is being opened during the operation of the first movable body 300, and the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened while considering the operating first movable body 300. Can be dealt with. Further, in the case of the second opening notification, it is possible to notify that the opening / closing frame 50 is open when the first movable body 300 is not operating, and the opening / closing frame 50 can be dealt with without worrying about the first movable body 300. can do. Therefore, when the opening / closing frame 50 is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be executed according to the presence / absence of operation of the first movable body 300. It should be noted that the door opening notification during the operation of the movable body and the door opening notification during the normal operation may be the same notification without distinction.

After S63, the operation of the first movable body 300 is restricted (S64). For example, the operation of the first movable body 300 is stopped. If the opening / closing frame 50 is detected during the operation of the first movable body 300, the operation of the first movable body 300 is restricted, so that damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transparent body 260 can be prevented. ..

As an example of limiting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S64), control may be performed to move the first movable body 300 to the standby position. According to this, for example, when the first control or the second control is being executed in the movable body effect, an operation abnormality of the first movable body 300 occurs and the first movable body 300 is placed in the first effect position. Even if it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance due to the fact that the ball does not move or the ball is clogged in the game area 10, the first opening / closing frame 50 is opened. Since the movable body 300 retracts toward a position where it does not come into contact with the rear transparent plate 261 (for example, a standby position or the like), it is possible to prevent the rear transparent plate 261 and the first movable body 300 from being damaged.

Further, when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened, even if the game ball that has stayed in the beaded state due to ball clogging falls, the first control causes the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, that is, the front side of the game area 10. By retracting the moving first movable body 300 to the standby position side, it is possible to prevent the dropped game ball from colliding with the first movable body 300, so that the first movable body 300 collides with the game ball. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being damaged or jumping due to a collision with the first movable body 300 and entering the back surface side of the board surface plate 200 through the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200.

On the other hand, when the door open detection switch is not on (S61; No), this process ends after S64 or after S65.

(Command analysis processing)
In the command analysis process, the reception command (effect control command received by the effect control board 12) stored in the effect control command reception buffer is analyzed (for example, the MODE data is confirmed), and which effect control is the received command. Specify whether it is a command and perform processing according to the specified production control command.

FIG. 26 shows the relationship between the effect control command specified by the analysis by the command analysis process and the processing content performed in the command analysis process corresponding to the effect control command. Each flag and each storage area in the figure are provided in the RAM 122. About a flag "Set" means to turn on the flag. The state of each flag and the command stored in each storage area may be reset or deleted at an appropriate timing. When a command for specifying addition of the number of reserved special figures or a command for specifying subtraction of the number of reserved special figures is received, the hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D or the second hold storage display area 5U of the effect display device 5A is received accordingly. You may increase or decrease the number of images.

(Production control process processing)
The effect control CPU 120 performs start setting (start setting of effect) for starting execution of various effects in the effect control process process, effect operation control for executing the effect set to start, and the like. Each flag, each timer, each counter and the like described below are provided in the RAM 122.

The effect start setting includes, for example, setting an effect control pattern in the RAM 122 as a pattern to be used, and setting an initial value in the process timer according to the effect control pattern set above. After setting the initial value, the timer value of the process timer is subtracted at a predetermined timing (at the start of the effect control process process, at the time of the effect operation control described later, etc.) each time a timer interrupt occurs. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects (including variable display of effect symbols), and is associated with a process timer determination value to be compared with the timer value of the process timer and the determination value. It is composed of process data including the effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lighting control data, etc.) and the end code. The data constituting the effect control pattern is stored in the ROM 121.

The effect operation control is a control for executing the effect based on the effect control pattern set in the start setting of the effect. Specifically, among the effect control execution data corresponding to the process timer determination value that matches the current timer value of the process timer, the display control command according to the display control data is transmitted to the display control unit 123 to display the effect. Images are displayed on the devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, drive control commands according to the drive control data are transmitted to the display device drive mechanism 900 to drive the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, and effects according to the voice control data. A sound signal is transmitted to the voice control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, and an illumination signal according to the lighting control data is transmitted to the LED control board 14 to turn on / off the effect LED 9. And control to execute the production. By repeatedly performing the effect operation control each time a timer interrupt occurs, execution of various effects is realized.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process processing. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 120 executes any of S170 to S175 according to the value of the effect process flag.

Next, the processes of S170 to S175 will be described. The variable display start waiting process in S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. In the variable display start waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a variation pattern designation command or the like from the main board 11 has been received. The determination may be made, for example, by whether or not the command is stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. When the command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1" and this process ends. If the command has not been received, this process ends as it is.

The variable display start setting process of S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 29, the effect control CPU 120 first determines a final stop symbol or the like as a final effect symbol as a variable display result of the effect symbol (S321). For example, the effect control CPU 120 finally stops based on variable display contents such as a variable pattern indicated by a variable pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and a variable display result indicated by a variable display result notification command. Determine the design. As an example, the variable display contents according to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include "non-reach (loss)", "reach (loss)", "non-probability (big hit)", and "probability (big hit)". is there.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the variable display state of the effect symbol does not change to the reach state, the final effect symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". ". When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", after the variable display state of the effect symbol is in the reach state, the final effect symbol of the reach loss combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is "loss". .. When the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the time saving state. When the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the variable display result becomes "big hit", and the game state after the end of the big hit game state becomes the probable change state.

When the variable display content is "non-reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 stops the different (mismatched) effect symbols in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left confirmed symbol updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effect, or the like, and uses a left confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, the left confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “left” effect symbol display area 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined among the confirmed effect symbols. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. For example, among the finalized effect symbols, the right finalized effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” effect symbol display area 5R on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right confirmed effect symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left confirmed effect symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table previously stored and prepared in the ROM 121 is referred to. As a result, among the finalized effect symbols, the medium confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined.

When the variable display content is "reach (loss)", the effect control CPU 120 finally stops the same (matching) effect symbols in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R. To decide. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the left and right confirmed symbols updated by the random number circuit 124, the random counter for effects, and the like, and uses a left and right confirmed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to or the like, among the finalized effect symbols, the effect symbols having the same stop-displayed symbol numbers in the "left" and "right" effect symbol display areas 5L and 5R on the screen of the effect display device 5A can be displayed. decide. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. As a result, among the finalized effect symbols, the medium confirmed effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” effect symbol display area 5C on the screen of the effect display device 5A is determined. For example, when the finalized effect symbols are the same as the symbol numbers of the left fixed effect symbol and the right confirmed effect symbol, and the finalized effect symbols are a big hit combination, an arbitrary value (for example, "" By adding or subtracting 1 ”) to the symbol number of the medium-fixed effect symbol, the finalized effect symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed effect symbol, the difference (symbol difference) between the left-fixed effect symbol and the right-fixed effect symbol may be determined, and the medium-determined effect symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", the effect control CPU 120 has the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Determines the same (matching) production symbol as the final stop symbol at. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L on the screen of the effect display device 5A, Determines the effect symbols having the same symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in 5C and 5R. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is "non-probability (big hit)" or "probability (big hit)", and whether or not the promotion effect during big hit is executed, a normal symbol (for example, an even number) is displayed. It suffices to determine whether the effect symbol to be shown) or the probability variation symbol (for example, the effect symbol indicating an odd number) is to be the final effect symbol. In the big hit middle promotion effect, the combination of the effect symbols (non-probable change big hit combination) that reminds the big hit but does not remind the probability change state is temporarily stopped and displayed in the effect display device 5A, and then the big hit game state or the big hit game state. It is a production that notifies whether or not a probability change state is reached at the end of.

As a specific example, when the variable display content is "non-probability change (big hit)", a fixed effect symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. Further, when it is determined that the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)" and the promotion effect during the big hit is not executed, the final effect symbol is determined from the plurality of types of probabilistic symbols. On the other hand, when it is decided to execute the big hit middle promotion effect even if the variable display content is "probability change (big hit)", the final effect symbol is determined from a plurality of types of normal symbols. As a result, it is possible to prevent the promotion effect during the jackpot from being executed even though the probabilistic pattern is derived and displayed as the final effect symbol, so as not to give the player a sense of distrust.

After the process of S321, the change effect setting process for setting the execution of the hold display change effect is executed (S322). In the change effect setting process, when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on the stored contents of the hold display data storage unit, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed. In the change effect setting process, the execution setting of the hold display change effect is performed when the execution condition of the hold display change effect is satisfied based on whether or not the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed. You may do so.

After the processing of S322, the effect control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of prepared patterns (S323). For example, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (special figure variation effect control pattern) in response to the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command, and uses it as a usage pattern. set. Further, the effect control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared effect control patterns (display change effect control patterns) in response to the execution setting of the hold display change effect by the change effect setting process of S322, and uses the pattern. Set as.

After the process of S323, the effect control CPU 120 executes the movable body effect setting process (S323A) for operating the movable body in the case of the reach effect of the super reach A, for example.

In the movable body effect setting process shown in FIG. 30A, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the effect pattern is the variation pattern of the super reach A based on the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command from the main board 11. (S501). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A is (S501; Yes), the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). Specifically, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and extracts the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 30 (B). It is used to determine whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, its operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 30 (B), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, “without execution” is 15%, and “with execution” is “operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation mode shown in FIG. 11). ) ”Is determined with a 55% probability, and“ with execution ”has a 30% probability of“ motion pattern PTA-2 (second motion mode shown in FIG. 12 after becoming the first motion mode shown in FIG. 11) ”. Is determined by. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is determined with a probability of 10%, and with "execution", "operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation form)" is determined with a probability of 20%. Then, "with execution" and "operation pattern PTA-2 (second operation form after the first operation form)" are determined with a probability of 70%. In the case of a big hit, the movable body production is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body effect of "motion pattern PTA-2 (second motion mode after the first motion mode)" is higher than in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. It is easy to execute, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit for the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 operates in the second motion form shown in FIG. 12, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, also in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "operation pattern PTA-1 (first operation mode shown in FIG. 11)" is executed, the first movable body 300 is the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the production of a movable body that operates in a motion form, and the interest of the game is improved. Here, the operation pattern PTA-2 is assumed to perform the second operation mode after becoming the first operation mode, but is not limited to this. For example, the operation pattern PTA-2 may perform only the second operation mode shown in FIG.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A but also in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach may include a fluctuation pattern having a pseudo-continuous fluctuation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

After the process of S502 shown in FIG. 30 (A), it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504). After the processing of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTA-1 or PTA-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not the super reach fluctuation pattern (S501; No), when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

Returning to FIG. 29, following the process of S323A, the effect control CPU 120 is provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 in response to the variation pattern specified by, for example, the variation pattern designation command. The initial value of the effect control process timer is set (S324). Then, a setting is made on the screen of the effect display device 5A to start the fluctuation of the effect symbol or the like (S325). At this time, for example, the display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern (effect control pattern when the special figure fluctuates) determined in the process of S323 is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 123. As a result, the variation of the effect symbol may be started in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of the effect display device 5A, which are "left", "middle", and "right".

After the processing of S325, the first hold display of the first hold storage display area 5D and the second hold display of the second hold storage display area 5U are updated in response to the start of the variable display of the effect symbol. (S326). For example, when the first special figure game is executed (started), the display part (leftmost display part) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the first hold storage display area 5D. , The first hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the left. On the other hand, when the second special figure game is executed (started), the display portion (display portion at the right end) corresponding to the hold number "1" is erased (digested) in the second hold storage display area 5U. At the same time, the second hold display in the display portion corresponding to the other hold numbers "2" to "4" is moved (shifted) one by one to the right. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (S327), and then the variable display start setting process ends.

Returning to FIG. 28, the variable display process in S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 31, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the timer value of the effect control process timer (S341). .. As an example, in the process of S341, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value. , It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed. If the variable display time has not elapsed in S341 (S341; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the hold display change effect period for executing the hold display change effect (S342). ). The hold display change effect period may be predetermined in, for example, an effect control pattern (display change effect control pattern) determined by the process of S323 shown in FIG. 29. In the case of the hold display change effect period (S342; Yes), control for executing the hold display change effect is performed (S343). In the process of S343, various commands created based on the setting of the display change effect control pattern are transmitted to the display control unit 123, the voice control board 13, the LED control board 14, and the like. As a result, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect LED 9 is turned on, blinking or extinguished. Alternatively, it is sufficient that the hold display change effect can be executed by a predetermined effect device by combining a part or all of them.

Whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is the reach effect period for executing the reach effect when it is determined in S342 that it is not the hold display change effect period (S342; No) or after the process of S343. Is determined (S346). The reach effect period may be predetermined in, for example, an effect control pattern determined according to the fluctuation pattern. When it is determined in S346 that the reach effect period is in effect (S346; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (S347). After the processing of S347, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the movable body effect flag is on (S347A). When the movable body effect flag is on (S347A; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation of the stick controller 31A or the like is valid during the operation valid period (S347B). When the operation is valid (S347B; Yes), it is determined whether or not the stick controller 31A has been operated (S347C). When the stick controller 31A is operated (S347C; Yes), the operation flag is set to the ON state (S347D). Movable when it is determined by S347B that the operation is not valid (S347B; No), when it is determined by S347C that the stick controller 31A is not operated (S347C; No), or after the processing of S347D. It is determined whether or not it is the body production period (S347E). When it is the movable body effect period (S347E; Yes), it is determined whether or not the operation flag is on (S347F). When the operation flag is on (S347F; Yes), the movable body effect execution process is performed (S347G). If the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), an alternative effect execution process is performed instead of the movable body effect (S347H). Even when the operation flag is not on (S347F; No), the movable body effect execution process may be performed (S347G).

When it is determined in S347A that the movable body effect flag is not on (S347A; No), when it is determined in S347E that it is not the movable body effect period (S347E; No), or after the processing of S347G. After the processing of S347H, the effect control CPU 120 performs an effect during variable display including a variable display operation of the effect symbol, based on, for example, a setting in the effect control pattern determined corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Is controlled to execute (S348).

When the variable display time has elapsed in S341 (S341; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (S349). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (S349; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so. When a symbol confirmation command is received in S349 (S349; Yes), for example, a predetermined display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, and the display result is displayed in the variable display of the effect symbol. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed effect symbol) to be displayed (S350). Further, in the process of S350, the final stop symbol in the variable display of the effect symbol is derived and displayed. Then, after the processing of S350, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (S351). After the processing of S351, the movable body effect flag and the operation flag are reset to the off state (S351A). Then, after updating the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit wait process (S352), the variable display effect process is terminated.

The special figure hit waiting process in S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The effect control CPU 120 determines whether the current elapsed time (measured by a predetermined timer) since the final stop symbol is derived and displayed has reached the preset hit start designation command reception waiting time. However, if the hit start designation command is received when the hit start designation command is not reached (when the hit start designation command reception flag is on), the jackpot production (from the start of the fanfare executed during the jackpot game state to before the ending) Set the start setting (such as setting the effect control pattern). After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4", and this process ends. If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not been reached and the hit start designation command has not been received, this process is terminated as it is. When the current elapsed time has reached the above waiting time, it is determined that the variable display result of the special figure game is "missing", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "0", and this process is terminated. Since the current elapsed time has not reached the above-mentioned waiting time and the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command has not elapsed, this process is terminated as it is.

The hitting process in S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set content on the screens of the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y. Operate the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, output sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effects signals) to the voice control board 13, and commands to the LED control board 14 (illumination signals). ) Is used to control various production operations during a predetermined period in which the large winning door as an attacker is opened, such as turning on and off the effect LED 9. In the hitting process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the hit end designation command from the main board 11.

The ending process of S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”, and is a process for executing the ending at the end of the jackpot game state. In the ending process, the effect display devices 5A, 5X, and 5Y perform display control to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

Next, an example of a composite effect including the movable body effect and the display device effect in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 32. 32 (A) to 32 (F) are explanatory views showing an example of the flow of the composite effect.

First, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), for example, after the reach state is established during the predetermined symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are set to the effect display device 5A. It moves closer to the position on the front side, and a display indicating that it has developed into a super reach effect or the like is executed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32 (C), the effect display devices 5X and 5Y come into contact with each other to form one display unit, and the display unit is urged to operate the operation means. The image is displayed.

When the player operates the operation means during the operation reception period of the operation means, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the standby position and the movable body effect according to the present embodiment is moved as shown in FIG. 32 (D). The movable body effect is executed assuming that the start condition of is satisfied, the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable body 500L, 500R are produced and the movable body unit moves from the operation standby mode to the first operation mode. Changes to. At this time, each movable body is superimposed on the front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, and the display unit of the effect display device 5A becomes difficult to see from the player.

When the first operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 32 (E), the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R are housed, and the first movable body 300 and the first movable body 300 and the first movable body 300 4 The movable bodies 600L and 600R perform an effect operation, and the movable body unit changes from the first operation mode to the second operation form. Also at this time, each movable body is superimposed on the front of the display unit of the effect display device 5A, and the display unit of the effect display device 5A becomes difficult to see from the player. Further, when the movable body effect is being executed (for example, when the movable body unit changes from the operation standby mode to the first motion mode as shown in FIG. 32 (D), and when the movable body unit is in the first motion mode, FIG. 32 When changing to the second operation mode as shown in (E), the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device) 6B light emitting component (LED), at least one of the light emitting component (LED) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the game board 2) is turned off or the brightness is lower than when the movable body effect is not executed. It is emitting light. As a result, the movable body effect can be made to stand out, and the player can be made to pay attention to the movable body effect. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Next, when the second operation mode of the movable body unit elapses for a predetermined time, the storage operation of the first movable body 300 and the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R is executed, and the movable body effect is completed. Then, the super reach effect is executed, and after the execution of the super reach effect, for example, in the case of a big hit, the effect display device 5A aligns the symbols indicating the big hit (for example, 7-7-7, etc.) and displays them. , An effect image (for example, a character, a character, etc.) is displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y.

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the first movable body 300 provided so as to be movable, and the first movable body 300 are controlled. A CPU 120 for effect control as a control means for the operation is provided, and the window portion 51 is arranged on the game region 10 side of the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250 to form a hole portion 270. At least a part of the first movable body 300 enters the space portion S formed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 via the hole portion 270, which has the second transparent body 260. It is possible, and the first movable body 300 can perform the second operation of moving to the first effect position that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. That is, the first movable body 300 can be made to enter the first effect position shown in FIG. 17 or 18 at once from the first standby position (origin position) shown in FIG. 16, providing a surprising movable body effect. be able to. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the first movable body 300 is accelerated and advanced between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 by the acceleration advance means (the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700). The slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 can be accelerated diagonally downward along the rail 701 of the base member 700 to advance. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, since the rail 701 of the base member 700 is a guide member having a diagonally downward linear path (downward guide path portion), the slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 is downward along the diagonally downward rail 701. By being guided, the first movable body 300 can be accelerated and advanced to the second position P2. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect. In addition, a part of the rail 701 may have a part other than the downward direction.

Further, the first movable body 300 is a first standby position (or a position where a part thereof may be superimposed on the display means) shown in FIG. 16 which is not superimposed on the effect display device 5A (display means). It is possible to operate from the origin position) to the first effect position shown in FIG. 17 or FIG. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position is invisible or difficult to see from the player, and the first movable body 300 at the origin position suddenly appears at the first production position, so that the player Can give a surprise to. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

Further, in the effect control CPU 120, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. After executing the first control of moving the front transmission plate 251 to the front transmission plate 251 side of the rear transmission plate 261 and the first control, a predetermined portion (front half) of the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302. The first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the above, is moved in a direction (front upward direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control, or after the first control is executed, the main body portion 302 The second protruding portion 304, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the surface A, is moved in a direction (front upper direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control. It is possible to perform the second control to be performed. According to this configuration, after performing the first control for moving the first movable body 300 toward the first transmissive body 250, at least a part of a predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 or the second By performing the second control of moving the projecting portion 304) on the first transmissive body 250 side of the second transmissive body 260 in a direction different from the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control (front upper direction). , Since the player can give more impact, the effect of the production can be improved.

Specifically, not only the first control for moving the first movable body 300 toward the first transparent body 250 side, but also a direction different from the moving direction (front-down direction) in the first control after the first control is performed. By performing the second control of moving in the (forward and upward direction), a part of the main body 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304) is expanded and the first movable body 300 is expanded. Because it looks like it is, it can have an impact on the player.

Further, the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged so as to face the front side of the board surface plate 200 so that the game ball can flow down from the game board surface 200A, and forms a flow area of the game ball between the rear transmission plate 261 and the game board surface 200A. Therefore, the hole portion 270 is formed at a position corresponding to the effect region (opening 2c formed in the board plate 200) that does not correspond to the flow-down region of the game ball in the game region 10. That is, since it is necessary to secure the flow area of the game ball, there is a limit to increasing the hole portion 270, and in order to allow the first movable body 300 to pass through the hole portion 270, the first movable body 300 is moved. It cannot be larger than the hole 270.

Therefore, as in the present invention, after performing the first control for moving the first movable body 300 to the front side, at least a part of a predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 (for example, the first protruding portion 303 or the second protruding portion 304). ) Is moved in a direction (front-up direction) different from the movement direction (front-down direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transmissive body 260, so that the hole portion 270 is made more than necessary. A part of the main body 302 is expanded when the first movable body 300 is viewed from the front (player side) at a position closer to the player on the front side than the rear transmission plate 261 without increasing the size. Because it can be made to look like, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect to the player.

Further, in the second control, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304, which are a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302, in the moving direction (front lower) in the first control. Move in the direction (forward and upward) that intersects with the direction). By doing so, the movement (protrusion operation) of the first protrusion 303 and the second protrusion 304 of the first movable body 300 in the second control can be preferably shown.

Further, in the second control, the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304, which are a part of the predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302, intersect with each other in the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control. In order to move the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304 in the front-up direction, which is the direction and is the direction along the front transmission plate 251 when viewed from the front, the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304 are placed around the main body portion 302. Since it can be expanded and moved toward the player side, it is possible to provide a more powerful effect.

The first movable body 300 moves in the direction opposite to the game area 10 (front side) in the second control, that is, moves so as to gradually protrude to the front side by the first control and the second control, so that a powerful effect is produced. It can be performed.

Further, since the first movable body 300 moves to the front side while descending forward and downward from the first standby position to the first effect position by the first control, the player side is compared with the one that moves horizontally. It is possible to make it easier to understand how it moves toward. Further, since not only the surface A but also the surface B of the main body 302 can be visually recognized when moving forward, the main body 302 can be made to look larger.

Further, in the first motion mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R that support the first movable body 300, and in the second motion mode, the fourth movable body 600L that supports the first movable body 300. , 600R and other supporting means. By doing so, it is possible to stabilize the posture of the first movable body 300 during and after the operation.

More specifically, the first movable body 300 is operably supported by a base member 700 provided on the back side of the game board 2, and moves to the front side via the board face plate 200 and the rear transmission plate 261. Since the moving distance is longer than that of the conventional movable body that moves only to the front of the rear transparent plate 261, it is conceivable to stably support it via a guide rail or the like, but to the front side of the rear transparent plate 261. If a guide rail or the like is provided, the visibility may be deteriorated because the guide rail or the like makes it difficult to see a part of the game area 10 behind when the movable body effect is not executed. Therefore, by making the other fourth movable bodies 600L, 600R and the like support only during the effect operation, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game area 10 from being lowered when the movable body effect is not executed. it can.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 includes a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the first movable body 300. After performing one control, it is possible to control the first movable body 300 to move the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, and the like so as to be able to be combined. By doing so, the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) support each other by the union. Therefore, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

Specifically, in the first operation mode and the second operation form of the movable body unit, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R different from the first movable body 300 are Since the first movable body 300 is arranged so as to be in contact with or close to the peripheral position, the first movable body 300 may shake after the protruding operation of the first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304 or the protruding operation. Even so, they can support each other and stabilize their posture.

Further, when the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the first motion mode, and in the second motion mode, the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are the first movable body 300. When combined with, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are arranged on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261. By doing so, when the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) are combined, Since the first movable body 300 in the first control is located at different positions in the moving direction (front-back direction), a sense of depth can be generated.

Further, the window portion 51 can open and close the game area 10 (see FIG. 3), and the first movable body 300 does not come into contact with the second transmissive body 260 when opening and closing the window portion 51 (see FIG. 21). By doing so, it is possible to prevent damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transparent body 260.

Specifically, the front portion of the first movable body 300 (the portion arranged on the front transmission plate 251 side of the hole 270 in the closed state of the opening / closing frame 50) is within the rotation region Z of the hole 270. Since they are arranged, the rear transmission plate 261 does not come into contact with the first movable body 300 even when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed. According to this, for example, an operation error or the like occurs during the operation of the movable body unit, that is, during the execution of the first control or the second control, and the first movable body 300 remains stopped at the first effect position. Even when it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance, the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261, so that the rear transmission plate 261 and the first movable body 300 are damaged. Can be prevented from doing so.

In the present embodiment, since the first movable body 300 is arranged in the rotation region Z of the hole portion 270 even during the execution of the first control and the second control in the movable body production, the rear transmission is transmitted. Although the embodiment in which the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the plate 261 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the opening / closing frame 50 is not in contact with the second transmissive body when opening / closing. Just do it.

Further, the first movable body 300 is capable of irradiating light other than the first transmissive body 250 after performing the first control (for example, movable body LED350A, movable body LED350B, movable body LED350CL, 350CR). , And movable body LEDs 350DL, 350DR, etc.) are provided. By doing so, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the player but also to the surroundings.

Specifically, not only the movement effect of the first movable body 300, but also the light emission effect of the movable body LED 350A, the movable body LED 350B, the movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, and the movable body LEDs 350DL, 350DR can be performed, so that the effect is produced in a wide range. Can be appealed.

Further, a game machine frame 3 having a game board 2 for forming the game area 10, an opening / closing frame 50 having a window portion 51 provided to be openable / closable with respect to the game machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening / closing frame 50. The effect LED 9 as a light emitting component on the opening / closing door side provided in an area other than 51 and the effect control CPU 120 as a light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the effect LED 9 are provided, and the effect control CPU 120 is a first movable body. It is possible to change the light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 to the first to fifth light emitting modes according to the operations of the 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R. .. By doing so, the movement of the first movable body 300 can be suitably produced.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode and then in the second light emission mode having a lower brightness than the first light emission mode. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the transparency of the first movable body 300 and the like.

Specifically, after performing the first control in the first light emitting mode, in the second light emitting mode in which the brightness of the movable unit is lower than that in the first light emitting mode when the movable body unit is in the first operating mode (second control mode). Since the light is emitted, halation or the like occurs due to the light of the effect LED 9 during the second control, which is an effect in which the first movable body 300 appears to be enlarged, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of each movable body. ..

Further, a game machine frame 3 having a game board 2 for forming the game area 10, an opening / closing frame 50 having a window portion 51 provided to be openable / closable with respect to the game machine frame 3, and a window portion in the opening / closing frame 50. An effect LED 9 as a light emitting component on the opening / closing door side provided in an area other than 51 and an effect control CPU 120 as a light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the effect LED 9 are provided, and the effect LED 9 is subjected to the first control. It is provided so as to be able to irradiate light toward the first movable body 300 after being broken. By doing so, the first movable body 300 can be made to stand out by light.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible (the above-mentioned configuration may be deleted). A modified example of the above embodiment is shown below. At least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, the second transmissive body 260 is formed with a hole 270, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second transmissive body 260 may be formed with a notch having a size that allows the first movable body 300 to enter.

(Modification example 1)
In the above embodiment, the first movable body 300 moves diagonally downward from the first standby position (origin position) toward the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (arrows 1 in FIGS. 13 and 16). (See), but it is not limited to this. As in the first modification shown in FIG. 33, the first movable body 300 has a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and a first The second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 that enters between the transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 may be feasible. That is, the first movable body 300 may operate in two stages as shown in FIG. 33. For example, the first movable body 300 moves from the first standby position (origin position P0) that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 to the first position P1 directly below the first motion ACT1 ( For example, movement in the hanging direction) is possible. Further, the first movable body 300 enters from the first position P1 toward the player side between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 through the hole 270 of the rear transparent plate 261. A second operation ACT2 (for example, movement in the horizontal direction) that operates at the two positions P2 is possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the first movable body 300 is at an origin position that is not superimposed on the effect display device 5A (display means) (or may be a position where a part thereof is superimposed on the display means). It is possible to operate from P0 to the first position P1 or the second position P2. For example, the first movable body 300 at the origin position P0 is invisible or difficult to see from the player, and the first movable body 300 at the origin position P0 suddenly appears at the first position P1 or the second position P2. As it comes, it can surprise the player. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), the first movable body 300 may have different operating speeds between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed at the first speed V1. The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed at the second speed V2. The operating speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) is higher than the operating speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). For example, the first speeds V1 and V2 may be the maximum speed, the average speed, and the like. Specifically, in the process of S502 of the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 34 (A). It is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the movable body effect and, if so, the operation pattern of the movable body effect by using the table.

As shown in FIG. 34 (A), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 10%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is 20%. It is determined by the probability, and "the second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, the movable body production is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTB-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is more than in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 33 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, also in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. 33. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the production of a movable body that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to the first modification, the first movable body 300 has a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 that enters between the second transmissive body 260 and the second transmissive body 260 can be executed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 operates at the second position P2 that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body is powerful for the player. It is possible to provide a production. Further, the operation speed differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, the operating speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) is higher than the operating speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). Therefore, since the operating speed of the second position P2 close to the player is faster than the operating speed of the first position P1 far from the player, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

The operating speed of the second operation ACT2 (second speed V2) may be smaller than the operating speed of the first operation ACT1 (first speed V1). In this case, since the operation speed when the first movable body 300 enters through the hole 270 or the notch in the rear transmission plate 261 is slow, the vibration of the first movable body 300 in the second operation ACT2 Etc. (vibration in a direction different from the traveling direction, etc.) can be reduced, and contact of the first movable body 300 with the hole 270 or the notch can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the failure of the first movable body 300 due to the second operation ACT2.

It should be noted that at least one of the operation speed, the operation range, the operation path, and the operation direction may be different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. In this modification 1, the operation speeds of the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 are different as shown in FIG. 34, and the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 operate as shown in FIG. 33. The directions are also different. For example, regarding the operating range, the operating range of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than that of the first operation ACT1, or vice versa. Further, regarding the operation path, the operation path of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than that of the first operation ACT1, or vice versa. Further, regarding the operation direction, the operation path of the second operation ACT2 may be larger or smaller than that of the first operation ACT1.

Further, as in another example 1 shown in FIG. 34 (B), the first movable body 300 has light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, etc.) associated with the operation in the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The light emission mode of 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) may be different. The first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1) is executed in the first light emission mode (for example, brightness I1). The second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2) is executed in the second light emission mode (for example, brightness I2). The brightness I2 of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the brightness I1 of the first operation ACT1. Specifically, in the process of S502 of Another Example 1, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 34 (B). It is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the movable body effect and, if so, the operation pattern of the movable body effect by using the table.

As shown in FIG. 34 (B), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 10%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is 20%. It is determined by the probability, and "the second operation pattern PTC-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, the movable body production is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTC-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is more than in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 33 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. 33. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the production of a movable body that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to another example 1, the first movable body 300 has a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The second operation ACT2, which operates at the second position P2 that enters between the second transmissive body 260, can be executed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 operates at the second position P2 that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body is powerful for the player. It is possible to provide a production. Further, the light emitting mode of the light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) associated with the operation differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, the second light emitting mode (for example, brightness I2) of the second operation ACT2 is smaller than the first light emitting mode (for example, brightness I1) of the first operation ACT1. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the glare when the first movable body 300 approaches the player side.

The second light emitting mode (for example, brightness I2) of the second operation ACT2 may be larger than the first light emitting mode (for example, brightness I1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, it is possible to make the first movable body 300 dazzle when it approaches the player side, and it is possible to provide a light emitting effect with an impact.

In another example 1, the light emitting means of the first movable body 300 (for example, the movable body LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) has different brightness as the first light emitting mode and the second light emitting mode. , Light intensity, emission color, blinking interval, emission sequence (for example, the order in which the movable LEDs 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR are lit, etc.) may be different.

Further, as in another example 2 shown in FIG. 34 (C), the first movable body 300 is a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) associated with the operation of the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The production sound may be different. In the first operation ACT1 (movement from the origin position P0 to the first position P1), the production sound of the first production sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) is output. In the second operation ACT2 (movement from the first position P1 to the second position P2), the production sound of the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) is output. The volume Vo2 of the second operation ACT2 is higher than the volume Vo1 of the first operation ACT1. Specifically, in the process of S502 of the second embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination shown in FIG. 34 (C). It is sufficient to determine whether or not to execute the movable body effect and, if so, the operation pattern of the movable body effect by using the table.

As shown in FIG. 34 (C), in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTC-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 10%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is 20%. It is determined by the probability, and "the second operation pattern PTC-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, the movable body production is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTC-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is more than in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 33 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "first operation pattern PTC-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. 33. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the production of a movable body that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

According to another example 2, the first movable body 300 has a first operation ACT1 that operates at a first position P1 that does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The second operation ACT2, which operates at the second position P2 that enters between the second transmissive body 260, can be executed. In particular, in the second operation ACT2, the first movable body 300 operates at the second position P2 that enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the movable body is powerful for the player. It is possible to provide a production. Further, the production sound of the sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) associated with the operation differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. Therefore, it is possible to provide a variety of movable body effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

For example, the production sound of the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) of the second operation ACT2 is louder than the production sound of the first production sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) of the first operation ACT1. Therefore, the second operation close to the player of the first movable body 300 can be excited by the effect sound. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

The production sound of the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) of the second operation ACT2 may be smaller than the production sound of the first production sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) of the first operation ACT1. In this case, the second motion ACT2 itself of the first movable body 300 can be focused on by intentionally weakening the effect by the effect sound for the second motion close to the player of the first movable body 300. For example, the silence effect allows the second motion ACT2 of the first movable body 300 to be watched. Therefore, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

In this alternative example 2, the volume of the effect sound accompanying the operation is different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2, but the present invention is not limited to this. At least one of the volume, pitch, tempo, music, melody, and the like of the effect sound associated with the operation may be different between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. As an example, as an example in which the music is different, in the first production sound mode of the first operation ACT1, for example, the music A is reproduced at a predetermined volume, and in the second production sound mode of the second operation ACT2, for example, the music B is at a predetermined volume (music). It may be played back at the same volume as in A). Further, as an example in which the music and the volume are different, in the first production sound mode of the first operation ACT1, for example, the music A is reproduced at the first volume, and in the second production sound mode of the second operation ACT2, for example, the music B is the second. It may be played at a volume (a volume different from the first volume in the case of the music A).

As shown in FIGS. 34A to 34C, the first movable body 300 performs the second operation ACT2 after the execution of the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 after the execution of the first operation ACT1. It may return to the origin position P0 without being executed, and the expectation degree controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the jackpot expectation degree) differs between the first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2. The player can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved. For example, when the second motion ACT2 has a higher expectation than the first motion ACT1, the second motion ACT2 is a motion effect at a position closer to the player than the first motion ACT1. The effect of moving body production can be enhanced.

Further, as the advance notice effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 during the variation display of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG. 35 (A), various advance notice effects can be executed at a plurality of timings from the start of the change to the stop of the change. It has become. These notices include a reach notice that suggests whether or not to reach, a reach development notice that suggests whether or not to develop into an advantageous reach, and a big hit notice that suggests the possibility of a big hit. The movable body effect of the above-described embodiment or modification may be executed in these notice effects.

As an example of determining the movable body effect at the time of the reach development notice, as shown in FIG. 35B, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and the extracted numerical data. And the table for determining the movable body effect shown in FIG. 35 (B) may be used to determine the operation pattern of the movable body effect. It should be noted that whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern may be determined. As shown in FIG. 35 (B), in the case of the super reach fluctuation pattern, "only the first motion ACT1" is determined with a probability of 30%, and "the second motion ACT2 after the first motion ACT1" has a probability of 70%. Is determined by. In the case of developing into super reach, it is easier to execute the movable body effect of "second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1" than the movable body effect of "first operation ACT1 only", and the big hit about the movable body effect. You can have a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game will improve.

As for the movable body effect at the time of the reach development notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 36 (A1), the normal reach effect is started, and an operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, when the first operation ACT1 is determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 35 (B), the first operation is determined as shown in FIG. 36 (A2). The movable body 300 performs the first operation ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 33 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1). When the second motion ACT2 is determined using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 35 (B), after the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 36 (A2) performs the first motion ACT1. As shown in FIG. 36 (A3), the second operation ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 33 advances to the second position P2 toward the player side) is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (A4), the super reach development is displayed, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. In addition, in the case of only the first operation ACT1, it may not develop into super reach. Further, in the determination example shown in FIG. 35 (B), a reach development pattern indicating reach development without the first movable body 300 not operating may be selectively provided.

As an example of determining the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice, as shown in FIG. 35 (C), the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and together with the extracted numerical data. The operation pattern of the movable body effect may be determined by using the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 35 (C). Further, in the case of the super reach A (loss) fluctuation pattern, the movable body effect is not executed. That is, the first movable body 300 does not operate and remains at the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body effect of "second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1" is executed. As shown in FIG. 33, if the first movable body 300 can have a big hit expectation for the movable body effect of executing the second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1, and the first movable body 300 operates ( After the first action ACT1, the second action ACT2) can be known that a big hit will be made (big hit confirmation notice), and the interest of the game will be improved.

As for the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice, for example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B1), the super reach effect is started, and the operation promotion image for promoting the operation of the stick controller 31A is displayed in the fanning effect. When the player operates the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the first movable body 300 moves to the first operation ACT1 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 33 moves from the origin position P0 to the first position P1. Move). Then, in the case of the super reach (big hit) shown in FIG. 35 (C), the first movable body 300 is the second operation ACT2 (the first movable body 300 shown in FIG. 33 is the game) as shown in FIG. 36 (B3). 2nd position P2 advance toward the person side). Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (B4), a jackpot display is displayed, and the first movable body 300 returns to the origin position P0. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach (loss) shown in FIG. 35 (C), the first movable body 300 does not operate, and as shown in FIG. 36 (B5), the first movable body 300 stops at the origin position P0. As it is, the loss display is displayed. That is, in the movable body effect at the time of the big hit notice, it is possible to know that if the first movable body 300 operates (the second action ACT2 after the first action ACT1), it will be a big hit (big hit confirmation notice).

In FIG. 36 (B1), the stick controller 31A is operated when the first movable body 300 is at the origin position P0, but as shown in FIG. 36 (B2), the first movable body 300 is in the first position. After moving to P1, the operation effect of executing the second operation ACT2 of the first movable body 300 based on the operation of the stick controller 31A may be executable. For example, "not operating" shown in FIG. 35C may be changed to "only the first operation". In this case, it is possible to provide an motion effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second motion ACT2 based on the detection of the player's motion. That is, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the first movable body 300 in the first position P1 moves to the second position P2, and the player can participate in the game, improving the interest of the game. Can be made to.

Further, at the first timing and the second timing in the variable display (variable display), the execution ratio in which only the first operation ACT1 is executed and the execution ratio in which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1 May be different. For example, only the first operation ACT1 is executed at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach development notice shown in FIG. 35 (A) and the execution timing (second timing) of the jackpot notice shown in FIG. 35 (A). The execution rate and the execution rate at which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1 are made different. In this case, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, both execution ratios may be different at a plurality of timings in a predetermined notice (for example, reach development notice).

(Modification 2A)
In the above embodiment, the first movable body 300 is moved diagonally downward from the first standby position (origin position) to the first effect position by the first drive mechanism 310 (see arrow 1 in FIG. 16). However, it is not limited to this. As in the modified example 2A shown in FIG. 37, the first movable body 300 is made to operate from the origin position P0 to the second position P2 on the concave arcuate path RT1 or on the convex arcuate path RT2. You may. That is, the downward guide path portion (rail, guide member, etc., which is not shown) of the first movable body 300 may be formed in a convex or concave downward arc-shaped path. According to the modification 2A, the first movable body 300 can be guided by a downward arc-shaped path, and the first movable body 300 can be accelerated downward and advanced. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(Modification 2B)
Further, as in the modified example 2B shown in FIG. 38, after the first movable body 300 operates from the origin position P0 to the first position P1, the first movable body 300 is concave at the first position P1 and the second position P2. It may be swingable along the arcuate path RT3. That is, the swing guide path portion (rail, guide member, etc., which is not shown) of the first movable body 300 may be formed in a concave arc-shaped path. According to the modification 2B, since the first movable body 300 can swing along the concave arc-shaped path RT3, it is possible to provide a movable body swinging effect in which the first movable body 300 advances and retracts. be able to. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

(Modification 2C)
Further, as in the modified example 2C shown in FIG. 39, the first movable body 300 can advance to the intermediate position PS1 of the concave arc-shaped path RT1 and the advanced position PS2 advanced from the intermediate position PS1. The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs between the case where the movable body 300 advances to the intermediate position PS1 and the case where the first movable body 300 advances to the advance position PS2. May be good. According to the modification 2C, the degree of expectation (for example, a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state depending on whether the first movable body 300 advances to the intermediate position PS1 or the first movable body 300 advances to the advanced position PS2. Since the degree of expectation etc.) is different, the player can be watched for the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved. For example, if the advance position PS2 has a higher degree of expectation than the intermediate position PS1, the advance position PS2 will produce an operation at a position closer to the player than the intermediate position PS1, and the movable body effect will be produced. The effect can be enhanced.

(Modification 2D)
Further, as in the modified example 2D shown in FIG. 40, the window portion 51 includes wall portions WL and WR (partition plates) extending in the direction connecting the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. The wall portions WL and WR may be erected on at least one of the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window portion 51 can be increased. Further, the wall portions WL and WR may be connected by the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. In this case, the strength of the window portion 51 can be further increased. In particular, in the window portion 51 having the space portion S into which the first movable body 300 can enter, such an improvement in strength is useful. The wall portions WL and WR are formed with downward linear or arcuate guide holes WL1 and WR1 (or guide grooves) that guide the first movable body 300 to the second position P2, respectively. .. Protruding rod portions BP protruding from the left side surface and the right side surface of the first movable body 300 can be inserted into the guide holes WL1 and WR1 of the wall portions WL and WR. Therefore, the wall portions WL and WR can not only increase the strength of the window portion 51 but also reduce the vibration of the first movable body 300 operating at the second position P2 in the vertical direction, so that the first movable body 300 can be moved. Can be supported stably.

Further, in the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the rail 701 advances toward the hole 270, but does not enter between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, but the rail 701 The (guide member) may enter between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 via the hole 270. According to this, since the rail 701 can advance toward the hole 270 or the notch, the advanced rail 701 accelerates the first movable body 300 to bring the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 together. You can advance in between. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

Further, the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be restricted based on the opening detection of the opening / closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch. According to this, damage to the first movable body 300 and the second transparent body 260 can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, when the first protruding portion 303 changes to the first protruding state so as to spread around the main body portion 302 by executing the second control, the first protruding portion 303 is viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Since the protruding portion 303 protrudes out of the region corresponding to the hole portion 270, that is, does not protrude toward the game region 10 side of the game ball, the first protruding portion 303 does not hinder the visibility of the game ball. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Modification 3 of FIG. 41, at least a part of a predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 corresponds to the gaming area 10 of the gaming ball. It may be moved so as to overlap the region to be played, or as shown in the modified example 4 of FIG. 42, at least a part of the predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is located in the region corresponding to the gaming region 10 of the gaming ball. The entire main body 302 may be moved so as to overlap.

(Modification 3)
Here, a modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. FIG. 41 is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 3. As shown in FIG. 41, in the main body portion 302 of the first movable body 300, the movable portions 306L and 306R can be moved in the left-right direction to a predetermined portion located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. In the case where the movable portions 306L and 306R are moved outward, at least a part of the movable portions 306L and 306R is outside the region corresponding to the hole portion 270. It may overlap with the position corresponding to 10.

(Modification example 4)
Further, a modification 4 will be described with reference to FIG. 42. FIG. 42 is a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 4. As shown in FIG. 42, in the main body 302 of the first movable body 300, the protrusions 307L and 307R project against the main body 302 at a predetermined portion located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 by executing the first control. When provided, the first movable body including the main body 302 is provided so that at least a part of these protrusions 307L and 307R overlaps the position corresponding to the game area 10 which is outside the area corresponding to the hole 270. The entire 300 may be moved in the left-right direction or the up-down direction.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) of the main body portion 302 in front of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole portion 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Although the embodiment in which the transparent plate can be moved to the front side until it is located on the 251 side is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part of the non-movable body provided in the base portion inoperably is provided. , It may be provided so as to be located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. Further, in this case, not only the movable body used for producing the movable body, but also, for example, at least a part of the guide passage capable of guiding the game ball is passed through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 through the rear transmission plate 261. It may be provided so as to be located on the front transmission plate 251 side.

For example, the warp passage 800 as an example of the guidance passage is a guidance passage that guides the game ball flowing down the game area 10 to a predetermined area (for example, a stage or a winning opening), and the guidance passage is such a warp. Not limited to the passage 800, it may be a winning passage for guiding the winning ball that has entered the winning area, a ball passage for directing, or the like.

(Modification 5)
Here, the modification 5 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. 43 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the fixed ball passage of the modified example 5, and FIGS. 43B and 43C are vertical cross-sectional views showing the mobile ball passage of the modified example 3.

As shown in FIG. 43A, a hole formed in the rear transmission plate 261 as a part of a passage forming member 801 made of a translucent synthetic resin material that forms a warp passage 800 in which a part bends forward. It is inserted into the portion 271 from the back side, and a part of the warp passage 800 is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 via the hole portion 271.

By doing so, it becomes possible to visually recognize how the game ball flows down the position close to the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 through the passage forming member 801. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. ..

Further, a passage forming member made of a translucent synthetic resin material that forms a first warp passage 800A that allows the game ball to flow down in a straight line and a second warp passage 800B that causes the game ball to meander and flow down. A part of 801 is provided so as to be movable back and forth between the first passage position (see FIG. 43 (B)) and the second passage position (see FIG. 43 (C)) in front of the first passage position. When moving to the second passage position, at least a part of the second warp passage 800B may be located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 through the hole 271 formed in the rear transmission plate 261.

By doing so, it becomes possible to visually recognize how the game ball flows down the position close to the front transmission plate 251 of the first transmission body 250 through the passage forming member 801. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a form in which a part of the main body portion 302 that moves by the second control is a first protruding portion 303 or a second protruding portion 304 that protrudes from the inside of the main body portion 302 has been illustrated. The invention is not limited to this, and in the movable body, a portion (predetermined portion) or a part thereof located on the side of the first permeator with respect to the second permeator via the hole portion by the first control is the second. It suffices if the control can move in a direction different from the movement direction in the first control. That is, the portion that operates in the second control is not limited to the portion that operates in a protruding manner, and may be a portion that can be moved by sliding movement, rotation, or the like. Further, the moving direction of the predetermined portion of the movable body can be freely changed, for example, left-right, up-down, diagonal direction, etc., if it is different from the moving direction of the movable body in the first control.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, only a predetermined portion (front half portion) of the main body portion 302 is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire first movable body 300 may be located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300, which is an example of the movable body, exemplifies a mode in which the first movable body 300 slides forward and downward from the first standby position to the first effect position. It is not limited to this, and it may move horizontally to the front side from the first standby position to the first effect position, or may move to the front upper side, the front left side, the front right side, or the like. That is, it is sufficient that the rear transmission plate 261 is provided so as to be movable from the rear side to the front side. Further, as long as it moves to the front side, it may move to the front side by rotation instead of slide movement.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300, which is an example of the movable body, exemplifies a form in which the front portion is arranged so as to be located in front of the rear transmission plate 261 at the first standby position. The present invention is not limited to this, and the whole may be arranged so as to be located behind the rear transmission plate 261 at the first standby position.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when only the first movable body 300 moves to the first effect position, a predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. Is not limited to this, and when a plurality of movable bodies such as the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R move to the effect position, the predetermined portion is rear-transparent. It may be located in front of the plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 is arranged at an upper position of the effect display device 5A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the arrangement position of the movable body is not limited to this. Can be changed arbitrarily.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of a movable body that operates so that a predetermined portion is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 when moved to the effect position, the first movable body that is a movable accessory for effect is used. Although 300 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. are moved to the effect position, the predetermined portion May be applied as a movable body that operates so as to be located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, or may be a movable body for effect provided separately from these. Further, the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the first hold indicator are not limited to the movable accessory for the effect connected to the effect control board 12 in this way. Even if various display devices connected to the main board 11, such as 25A, the second hold display 25B, and the normal figure hold display 25C, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc. are applied as movable bodies. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first movable body 300 as a movable body exemplifies a form in which at least a part (second half) is provided on the back side of the game board 2, but the present invention is limited to this. It may be provided on the front side of the game board surface 200A of the board surface plate 200.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable body is supported by a second movable body (for example, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the movable body. Although the form as the support means has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a lock mechanism or the like for fixing the movable body itself or the drive mechanism for operating the movable body at an appropriate timing may be used as the support means. Good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are combined with the first movable body 300, they are on the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261. Although the form of arrangement is illustrated, for example, the movable body can be expanded and contracted back and forth so as to extend from a position behind the rear transmission plate 261 to a position in front of the rear transmission plate 261. You may try to give a feeling of depth.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, after the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are united with the first movable body 300, the first protruding portion 303 or the first protruding portion 303 or the first by the second control. Although the form in which the two projecting portions 304 project is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first projecting portion 303 and the second projecting portion 304 project or move at the same time as or before the coalescence. You may do so.

Further, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, and the window portion 51 includes the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250. The first transmissive body 250 has a front transmissive plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion and a first tubular body 252 as a tubular portion, and has a second transmissive body 260 arranged closer to the game area 10. And a second tubular body 253, and the tubular portion has a reinforcing structure portion 254.

By having the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion in this way, the first transparent plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion can be used without increasing the plate thickness of the opening / closing frame 50. Since the rear transparent plate 261 can be arranged separately, the effect of effect is improved, and since the tubular portion of the first transparent body 250 is reinforced, the front transparent plate 251 which is the plate-shaped portion of the first transparent body 250 It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as an unauthorized member entering from a tubular portion that covers the periphery of the space portion S formed between the rear transparent plate 261 and the rear transparent plate 261.

More specifically, the tubular portion composed of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 is provided so as to be visible to the player so as to project forward from the opening of the opening / closing frame 50. There is a high possibility that fraudulent acts such as entering fraudulent members from the tubular portion while avoiding the front transparent plate 251 made of plates will be performed, but as described above, the reinforcing structure portions 254 are provided at a plurality of locations. Since the strength of the tubular portion is improved, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts such as bending the tubular portion to create a gap between the tubular portion and the front transmission plate 251 or making a hole to allow an unauthorized member to enter. ..

Further, the reinforcing structure portion 254 is an uneven portion (for example, convex portions 254A, 255A, concave portions 254B, 255B, etc.) extending from the front transmission plate 251 toward the second transmission body 260. , The tubular portion can be suitably reinforced. More specifically, since the strength in the front-rear direction is improved, it is possible to prevent the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 from being damaged by an impact when an external force is applied such as the front transmission plate 251 being hit. ..

Further, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion are formed in a tubular shape by a non-translucent synthetic resin material. Further, since the outer peripheral surface of the first tubular body 252 and the inner peripheral surface of the second tubular body 253 are plated, ambient light (for example, external light or an adjacent gaming machine) can be used. It is possible to prevent light or the like from entering and reducing the visibility of the game area 10.

Further, by forming the reinforcing structure portions 254 at a plurality of locations in the circumferential direction of the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, uneven portions are formed on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion, and such unevenness is formed. By plating the portion and the outer peripheral surface, the decorative portion is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion, so that the appearance can be improved.

Further, an upper plate 90 as a storage portion capable of storing the game ball is provided below the window portion 51, and the front transmission plate 251 is provided so as to be inclined downward toward the game region 10 side. , It is possible to prevent the first transmissive body 250 from getting in the way when the game ball is thrown into the upper plate 90.

Further, the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 are separably integrated. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 are integrated by attaching the screw N2, and can be separated by removing the screw N2. ing.

By doing so, for example, one of the front transparent plate 251 and the rear transparent plate 261 may be scratched or deteriorated over time, so that the visibility of the game area 10 may be reduced or damaged. When it becomes necessary to replace the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, only one of them can be partially replaced, so that the cost at the time of replacement can be reduced. .. In particular, only the second transmissive body 260 having the rear transmissive plate 261 having a different shape and position of the hole 270 depending on the model can be replaced, and the first transmissive body 250 can be used in common with a plurality of models. Become.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the hole portion 270 formed in the rear transmission plate 261 constituting the second transmission body 260 is located at a position corresponding to the opening 2c formed in the board surface plate 200, that is, a flow region of the game ball. Although the embodiment formed at a position corresponding to a region other than the region (effect region) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least a part thereof is formed at a position corresponding to the flow region of the game ball. You may be.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a mode in which the hole portion 270 is formed in the post-transmissive plate 261 constituting the second transmissive body 260 has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the post-transmissive plate is not limited thereto. A notch may be formed in 261. Specifically, for example, in order to make the game area 10 visible, the rear transmission plate 261 is formed to have substantially the same shape as the game area 10, but a notch is formed in a part of the peripheral edge thereof. The movable body may be moved to the front side through the notch until it is located on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the hole 270 is provided at only one place, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the holes and cutouts are formed at a plurality of places. May be good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first transmissive body 250 includes a front transmissive plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion made of a transparent member, and a first tubular body 252 and a second tubular body 253 as a tubular portion. The first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are made of a non-permeable member, that is, a part of the first transparent body 250 is made of a non-permeable member. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 may also be composed of a transparent member. That is, the first permeable body 250 may have at least a part of a plate-shaped portion or a tubular portion made of a permeable member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second transmissive body 260 has a rear transmissive plate 261 and a frame body 262, and the frame body 262 is composed of a non-transparent member, that is, the second transmissive body. Although the form in which a part of the body 260 is made of a non-permeable member is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the frame body 262 may also be made of a transparent member. That is, the second transmissive body 260 may be at least partially composed of a transmissive member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are applied as the tubular portion constituting the first transparent body 250, but the present invention is limited thereto. The tubular portion is completely tubular as long as it is composed of a wall portion that closes the side peripheral surface of the space portion S formed between the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261. It may not be necessary, for example, it may be composed of a side wall portion formed in an arch shape. Specifically, the tubular portion has a substantially quadrangular side view, but may have a triangular side view.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmissive plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion constituting the first transmissive body 250 and the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 as the tubular portion are separate from each other. Although the form configured by integrally assembling the members has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the plate-shaped portion and the tubular portion are integrally molded with a permeable synthetic resin material. You may do so.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, that is, a form in which the tubular portion is composed of a plurality of members is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited thereto. Instead, it may be composed of a single member.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmissive plate 251 is a glass material, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 are a non-translucent synthetic resin material, and the rear transmissive plate 261 is a synthetic synthetic having translucency. Although the form composed of the resin material has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the front transmissive plate 251 may be composed of a translucent synthetic resin material or may be post-transparent. The plate 261 may be made of a glass material. Further, the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253 may be made of a translucent synthetic resin material.

(Modification 6)
Here, the modification 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In FIG. 44, (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a window unit as a modified example 4, (B) is a vertical cross-sectional view showing a window unit, and (C) is a cross section showing a window unit as another example. A plan view, (D) is a side view of (C).

As shown in FIG. 44 (A), when the tubular body 252A constituting the tubular portion of the first transmissive body 250 is made of a translucent synthetic resin material, for example, the first movable body 300 The light emitted outward from the movable bodies LEDs 350CL and 350CR mounted on the first movable body 300 is in a state where the predetermined portion of the above is moved to the first effect position which is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. It passes through the tubular body 252A and is emitted to the left and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1. Therefore, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the players who play the game with the pachinko gaming machine 1 but also to the players around it.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), for example, in a state where a predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is moved to an effect position which is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, above the window portion 51 in the opening / closing frame 50 Alternatively, the light emitted from the effect LED 9 provided on the left and right sides or below may be transmitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space portion S through the tubular body 252A. .. By doing so, it is possible to irradiate light from directly above (or directly beside or directly below) the first movable body 300 that has moved to the first effect position, so that the effect of the first movable body 300 can be further improved. it can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 44 (B), when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 The light emitted from the predetermined effect (for example, the effect LED 9 is transmitted from the side surface portion (cylindrical body 252A of FIG. 44) to the first movable body 300 inside the space portion S through the tubular body 252A. By executing (for example, the first movable body 300 is light-emittingly decorated by being emitted), a decorative effect for decorating the first movable body 300 is executed. That is, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 can be decorated by a predetermined effect of the side surface portion (cylindrical body 252A of FIG. 44). Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of execution patterns as decoration effects. For example, the effect LED 9 is a full-color LED, and as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the effect LED 9 can emit light in three types of light emission patterns (a plurality of types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red. The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state may be different depending on the type of the light emission pattern (the type of the execution pattern of the decoration effect). For example, the degree of expectation may be in the relationship of blue (degree of expectation: small) <green (degree of expectation: medium) <red (degree of expectation: large). According to this, the player performs a decorative effect (a light emission effect of the first movable body 300 according to the degree of expectation by irradiating the first movable body 300 with blue, green, and red light from the effect LED 9). Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, even if the entire tubular body 252A does not have translucency, only a part thereof may have translucency. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), a perspective window 258 is formed on a part of the peripheral surface (for example, the left and right side surfaces) of the tubular body 252A made of a non-transmissive synthetic resin material. 5X, 5Y are arranged so that the display unit faces the perspective window 258 when the display unit is moved to the effect position where the display unit is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. The image displayed on the display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y inside the S may be visually recognized through the perspective window 258. By doing so, a predetermined effect that the image displayed on the effect display devices 5X and 5Y moved to the display position can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed, so that the effect of the effect can be further improved. Can be done.

(Modification 7)
As shown in the modified example 7 shown in FIG. 45, the second transmissive body 260 (second transmissive member) has a light incident portion 260a through which light can be incident, and the game machine frame 3 (game machine main body) is the first. The tubular body 252A (side surface portion) of the second transmissive body 260 has an LED 9a (light emitting component) arranged on the opposing portion 3a facing the light incident portion 260a of the two transmissive body 260, and the light incident portion 260a is formed from the LED 9a. The light incident on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) has a light guide portion 260b capable of guiding the inside of the tubular body 252A (side surface portion), and the light from the light guide portion 260b is a space portion of the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). It may be possible to emit light from the surface on the S side toward the first movable body 300. The tubular body 252A is, for example, a light guide member, and the light incident on the inside of the tubular body 252A can be emitted from the surface on the space S side. Further, a light shielding member 260c (incident suppression means) is provided at the tip of the tubular body 252A on the first transmissive body 250 side, and the light incident on the inside of the tubular body 252A is the first transmissive body. It is designed not to be incident on 250. A reflection member (incident suppression means) may be provided instead of the light-shielding member 260c.

According to the modified example 7, the second transmitter 260 of the opening / closing frame 50 in which the LED 9a is arranged in the gaming machine frame 3 and can be opened / closed with respect to the gaming machine frame 3 emits the light incident from the LED 9a to the second. The tubular body 252A (side surface portion) has a light guide portion 260b that can be propagated inside the transmissive body 260 and can be guided to the tubular body 252A (side surface portion), and the light from the light guide portion 260b is the first from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). Since the light can be emitted toward the movable body 300, a decorative effect can be realized without electrically connecting the opening / closing frame 50 and the gaming machine frame 3 with a connecting cable or the like. That is, it is not necessary to provide the opening / closing frame 50 with electric parts. Therefore, the problem of biting the electrical wiring when closing the opening / closing frame 50 can be solved.

An LED 9a (light emitting component) is provided on the opening / closing frame 50 side, and the LED 9a on the opening / closing frame 50 side and the control board or power supply board provided on the game machine frame 3 (game machine main body) side are electrically connected by a connecting cable. It may be connected to. According to this configuration, since the opening / closing frame 50 includes an LED 9a (light emitting component) for causing the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) to emit light, the tubular body is formed from the LED 9a (light emitting component) only on the opening / closing frame 50 side. An optical path up to 252A (side surface) can be secured. Further, since it is not necessary to arrange the LED 9a (light emitting component) on the side of the game machine frame 3 (game machine main body), the degree of freedom in designing the game machine frame 3 (game machine main body) can be improved.

Further, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, as shown in FIG. 45, a plurality of types of movements (for example, rotation of the first movable body 300) , Expansion, rocking, deformation, etc.), and the execution pattern of the decoration effect differs according to these multiple types of movements (multiple types according to the rotation, expansion, rocking, and deformation of the first movable body 300). (For example, the light emitting mode of) may be adopted. In this case, it is possible to provide a variety of decorative effects. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, in the game area, a game area side light emitting component (for example, a light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52) different from the light emitting component (for example, LED 9a shown in FIG. 45), a normal winning ball device 6A, or a normal variable A light emitting component (LED) of the winning ball device 6B and at least one of a light emitting component (LED) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the game board 2) are arranged, and when the decorative effect is executed, the game area The side light emitting component may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the decoration effect is not executed. In this case, the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 can be made conspicuous by irradiating light from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). Therefore, the player can be watched for the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, an effect LED 9 (light emitting component on the opening / closing door side) different from the LED 9a (light emitting component) shown in FIG. 45 is arranged on the opening / closing frame 50, and when performing a decorative effect, the effect LED 9 is turned off or the decorative effect is turned off. May be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when is not executed. In this case, when the decorative effect is executed, the effect LED 9 (light emitting component on the opening / closing door side) of the opening / closing frame 50 is turned off or the decorative effect is emitted with a lower brightness than when the decorative effect is not executed. The first movable body 300 that has entered between the body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 is irradiated with the light emitted from the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) through the light guide portion 260b. The first movable body 300 is bright, and the decorative effect can be made conspicuous by darkening the parts other than the window portion 51 of the opening / closing frame 50. Therefore, the player can be watched for the decoration effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the predetermined effect may be executed based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the mode of the predetermined effect may be changed based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B. According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 8)
As in the modification 8 shown in FIG. 46 (A), the specific effect may be executed in the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) connecting the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. According to the modified example 8, the effect of the effect can be improved by executing the specific effect on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) connecting the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. Further, the specific effect on the side surface portion can be executed regardless of whether or not the first movable body 300 has advanced. For example, the first movable body 300 is placed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. By executing a specific effect on the side surface when entering, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Further, when the movable body does not enter between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the execution of the movable body effect can be expected by executing the specific effect on the side surface portion. , The effect of the production can be enhanced.

As shown in FIG. 46 (A), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) includes an image display means DP (for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL, etc.) for displaying an image as the specific effect. According to this, since the image display means DP provided on the side surface portion displays the image of the specific effect, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, instead of the image display means DP, a projection means (projector) for projecting an image is provided, and the image from the projection means (projector) is projected onto the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) to form the tubular shape. The specific effect may be executed on the body 252A (side surface portion).

(Modification 9)
As in the modified example 9 shown in FIG. 46 (B), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) is an image that guides and displays an image for the specific effect by guiding the incident light to the inside. A light guide display means (for example, a light guide plate GP) may be provided. For example, light that is incident on the tubular body 252A and guided inside the tubular body 252A is incident on the light guide plate GP, and the light guide is displayed on the light guide plate GP by the incident light. Light from a light emitting component (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, etc. shown in FIG. 44) passes through the tubular body 252A and is incident on the light guide plate GP, and the light guide is displayed on the light guide plate GP by the incident light. Anything like that. According to the modified example 9, the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate GP) provided on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) displays the image for the specific effect as a guide, so that the effect of the effect is improved. be able to.

(Modification example 10)
As in the modified example 10 shown in FIG. 47 (A), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) includes a light guide member 260d capable of guiding the incident light, and the light guide member 260d emits a plurality of light. A corresponding area portion 260e (in FIG. 47, a group of LEDs having three horizontal rows) and a corresponding region portion 260e in which the light guide member 260d is divided into a plurality of parts corresponding to each light emitting portion 9b (in FIG. ) And. The tubular body 252A itself may be a light guide member. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding region portion 260e in the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) corresponding to the light emitting portion 9b emits light. For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding region portion 260e sequentially emits light from a side farther from the player to a side closer to the player. On the contrary, the effect may be such that the light is emitted sequentially from the side closer to the player to the far side. The specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modification 10, the effect of the effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 47 (B), a plurality of types of light emitting mode patterns in which the light emitting mode of the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) is stepwise different (a pattern in which only the corresponding region portion 260e on the innermost side emits light, and the innermost side). There are three types of patterns: a pattern in which the two intermediate region portions 260e emit light and a pattern in which all the corresponding region portions 260e emit light), and the degree of expectation to be controlled to an advantageous state is determined according to the type of these emission mode patterns. It may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the light emitting mode pattern, the player can be made to pay attention to the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, as the specific effect, there are a plurality of types of specific light emission patterns (for example, specific light emission patterns in which at least one of the light emission color, the brightness, and the blinking interval is different), and the control is performed in an advantageous state according to the type of the specific light emission pattern. The degree of expectation to be given may be different. In this case, since the degree of expectation controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern, the player can be watched for the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when executing the specific effect, the game area side light emitting component (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game board). At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of 2) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or the specific effect is emitted with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed, so that the specific effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the player can be watched for the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when executing the specific effect, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. According to this, when the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side of the opening / closing door (the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed. You can make a specific effect stand out. Therefore, the player can be watched for the specific effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, it is provided with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the player's motion, and is based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, stick by the controller sensor unit 35A). The specific effect may be made executable (based on the operation detection of the controller 31A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, light from the image light guide display means (for example, the light guide plate GP shown in FIG. 46 (B)) or the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. 47 (A)) is the first transmitter 250 and the first. An incident suppressing means (for example, a light-shielding member 260c or a reflecting member shown in FIG. 45) for suppressing being incident on at least one of the two transmissive bodies 260 may be provided. According to this, the light guide plate shown in FIG. 46 (B) is used by the incident suppressing means (for example, the light shielding member 260c and the reflecting member shown in FIG. 45, or the separation portion (gap portion)). It is suppressed that the light from the GP) or the light guide member (for example, the light guide member 260d shown in FIG. 47 (A)) is incident on at least one of the first transmitter 250 and the second transmitter 260. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a part of the first transmissive body 250 or the second permeator 260 from becoming an unexpected light emitting mode. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the window portion 51 may be provided with a main body member to which the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 can be attached and detached. For example, the first transparent body 250 is exposed to the player side, and the first transparent body 250 may be intentionally injured by a malicious player or the like, and is more easily damaged than the second transparent body 260. Further, regarding the second transparent body 260, if the opening / closing frame 50 is opened while the first movable body 300 is advanced, the first movable body 300 may come into contact with the second movable body 300. As described above, since the first transparent body 250 or the second transparent body 260 can be replaced in units, it is not necessary to replace the entire window portion 51. Therefore, the parts replacement cost can be reduced, and the maintenance of the window portion 51 is excellent.

(Modification 11)
In the modified example 10, in FIG. 47, the light emitting portion 9b in three horizontal rows and the corresponding region portion 260e in three horizontal rows are used. However, as in the modified example 11 shown in FIG. The portion 9b and the corresponding region portion 260e of a plurality of vertical rows may be used. The specific effect may be an effect in which the corresponding region portions 260e in a plurality of vertical rows emit light. For example, as shown in FIG. 48B, the specific effect may be an effect in which each corresponding region portion 260e emits light in sequence from bottom to top. On the contrary, it may be an effect of emitting light sequentially from top to bottom. The specific effect may be an effect in which the light emitting portion 9b of the light guide member 260d emits light. According to the modification 11, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(Modification 12)
Next, a modification 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. 49A and 49B are a cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 12, and FIG. 49B is a front view showing an effect mode of the light guide plate effect. In this modification 12, an example in which the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 function as a light guide plate will be described.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 49 (A) and 49 (B), the front transmissive plate 251 reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 290 incident on the inside from the left and right side end faces forward and emits the light from the front surface. A light emitting region E1 that forms a predetermined light guide pattern, that is, a light emitting region E1 that emits light by light incident on the front transmission plate 251 (see the halftone dot region in FIG. 49B) and left and right side end faces. It has a non-light emitting region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 290 incident on the inside from the front and emits it from the front surface.

The rear transmission plate 261 is provided in the first movable body 300, and forms a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects the light from the light guide plate LED 291 incident inside from the side end surface of the hole 270 forward and emits it from the front surface. The light emitting region E2, that is, the light emitting region E2 (see the shaded area in FIG. 49 (B)) that emits light by the light incident on the rear transmission plate 261 and the side end surface of the hole 270 are incident on the inside. It has a non-light emitting region that does not form a predetermined light guide pattern that reflects light from the light guide plate LED 291 forward and emits light from the front surface.

The light emitting regions E1 and E2 are formed on the back side in a fine uneven state (rough surface) so as to guide the incident light from the light guide plates LEDs 290 and 291 incident on the inside from the end face and emit it from the front surface. Specifically, the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are formed in an uneven state (rough surface) forming a substantially semicircular shape with a constant pitch in a cross-sectional view when the traveling direction of light is viewed from the side (detailed). Not shown).

When light is incident inside from the end faces of the front transmission plate 251 and the back transmission plate 261, the front transmission plate 251 and the back transmission plate 261 are designated by a dot pattern composed of a plurality of recesses formed in the light emitting regions E1 and E2. An image (still image) is displayed (see halftone dot area and shaded area in FIG. 49 (B)).

As shown in the modified example 12, the front transmissive plate 251 of the first transmissive body 250 and the rear transmissive plate 261 of the second transmissive body 260 serve as a light guide plate that guides the light incident from the end face to emit light. By functioning, it is possible to further enhance the effect of the movable body effect. In particular, even when the movable body has moved to an effect position where the predetermined portion is on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, the light emitting region E1 can emit light in front of the movable body to produce the movable body.

Further, by enabling the light emitting region E1 and the light emitting region E2 behind the light emitting region E1 to emit light, the light emitting regions E1 and E2 corresponding to the front-rear position of the movable body can be made to emit light, so that the movable body can emit light. It is possible to produce light emission at a closer location. Further, by simultaneously emitting light in the light emitting regions E1 and E2, a feeling of depth in the front and back can be generated, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

Further, in the present modification 12, the first transmissive body 250 attached to the opening / closing frame 50 side is provided by allowing the light from the light guide plate LED provided on the movable body to be incident from the end face of the hole 270. Since it is not necessary to provide the light emitting body on the second transmissive body 260 and it is not necessary to route the wiring from the game machine frame 3 side on which the effect control board 12 is mounted, it is possible to avoid complication of the wiring work. The light emitting region E2 may be made to emit light by the light from the light guide plate LED provided on the window unit 51A side. Further, although the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are provided on both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261, they may be provided on only one of them.

Further, in the present modification 12, an example in which the light emitting regions E1 and E2 are provided on both the front transmission plate 251 and the rear transmission plate 261 has been described, but the tubular portion is guided by the light incident from the end face. It may function as a light guide body that emits surface light. In this case, the tubular portion is composed of a translucent member having translucency, and light is incident from the front end or the rear end of the tubular portion so that the light emitting region provided on a part of the outer peripheral surface emits light. It should be.

(Modification 13)
As in the modified example 13 shown in FIG. 50, the movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) different from the first movable body 300 is provided, and the movable light guide plate MGP is the first position P1 of the first movable body 300. It can be positioned at the third position P3 between the second position P2, and when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, it does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. It may be possible to move to the four positions P4. For example, the movable light guide plate MGP is a light guide plate (transparency effect means) that displays light by guiding light inside, and is a light guide plate drive mechanism (not shown) at a third position P3 and a fourth position P4. It is possible to move with. As shown in FIG. 50, the fourth position P4 is a position closer to the first transmissive body 250 than the second position P2. The light guide plate drive mechanism (not shown) includes a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor (determination means) for detecting the position of the movable light guide plate MGP.

In the movable body effect execution process (S347G) of the modified example 13 shown in FIG. 51, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71). When it is determined that the movement timing is (S71; Yes), the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP from the third position P3 to the fourth position P4 is started (S72). After the process of S72, it is determined whether or not the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73). In the effect control CPU 120, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the detection signal of the fourth position sensor is turned on, and the movable light guide plate MGP is moved to the fourth position P4 based on the detection signal from the fourth position sensor. Can be determined to have reached. When the movable light guide plate MGP has reached the fourth position P4 (S73; Yes), the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 is started (S74), and the first movable body 300 is the first. The operation at the two positions P2 is executed (S75).

On the other hand, when the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4 (S73; No), the operation of the first movable body 300 is restricted (S76). When the detection signal from the fourth position sensor is not turned on after a predetermined first time has elapsed from the start of movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4, the effect control CPU 120 causes the movable light guide plate MGP to move. It may be determined that the fourth position P4 has not been reached. Further, the second time from the start of movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 (however, the second time is a time shorter than the first time and includes a time away from the third position P3). If the detection signal of the third position sensor does not turn off even after the lapse of time, the movable light guide plate MGP remains at the third position P3, and the movable light guide plate MGP has not reached the fourth position P4. You may judge.

The contents of limiting the operation of the first movable body 300 (S76) include operating the first movable body 300 at the first position P1 and moving to the second position P2 of the first movable body 300 as shown in FIG. It may be possible to stop the movement of the first movable body 300, keep the operation of the first movable body 300 stopped, and the like.

After the processing of S76, the light guide plate operation abnormality flag indicating that the movable light guide plate MGP is malfunctioning is set to ON (S77). When it is not the movement timing of the movable light guide plate MGP (S71; No), after the processing of S75, or after the processing of S77, the movable body effect execution processing is terminated.

According to the modification 13, when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, it can be moved to the fourth position P4 which does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. It is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, when the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP is closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2, the movable light guide plate MGP has entered between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260. Since the movable light guide plate MGP is moved to the fourth position P4 on the front side of the second position P2, it is possible to provide the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP advance. The effect of can be improved.

Since the movable light guide plate MGP is a transparent effect means for displaying the light by guiding the light inside, the effect of the effect can be improved by the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP. For example, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 and the first movable body 300 is located at the first position P1, that is, the movable light guide plate MGP is in front of the first movable body 300 at the first position P1. When it is located on the side, it is possible to perform a movable body effect by the light guide display of the movable light guide plate MGP and the first movable body 300 located behind it, so that a powerful movable body effect is provided to the player. can do. Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4 and the first movable body 300 is located at the second position P2, that is, the light guide display of the advanced movable light guide plate MGP and the first advanced behind it. Since the movable body effect by the movable body 300 can be executed, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect. Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, it is possible to provide a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves to the second position P2 after the movable light guide plate MGP moves to the fourth position P4. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

When the movable light guide plate MGP cannot move to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 is operated at the first position P1 instead of advancing the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 from coming into contact with the immovable movable light guide plate MGP, and it is possible to prevent damage to the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP. Further, since the first movable body 300 operates at the first position P1, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort with respect to the movable body effect.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP cannot be moved to the fourth position P4, the first movable body 300 is not moved to the second position P2, or the first movable body 300 is kept stopped. It is possible to prevent the first movable body 300 from coming into contact with the immovable movable light guide plate MGP, and it is possible to prevent damage to the first movable body 300 and the movable light guide plate MGP.

Further, the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state may be different depending on whether the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3 or the fourth position P4. .. According to this, the player can be made to pay attention to the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B). (LED), at least one of the light emitting parts (LED) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the game board 2) is turned off, or the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. The light may be emitted at a low brightness. According to this, it is possible to make the movable body effect stand out. Therefore, the player can be watched for the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the fourth position P4, the effect LED 9 (light emitting component on the opening / closing door side) of the opening / closing frame 50 is turned off, or the movable light guide plate MGP is not located at the fourth position P4. May be made to emit light with low brightness. According to this, it is possible to make the movable body effect stand out. Therefore, the player can be watched for the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 and the second movement of the first movable body 300 based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). The move to position P2 may be feasible. According to this, the effect of the production can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 14)
In the modified example 13, the fourth position P4 is set closer to the first transmissive body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 50, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, as in the modified example 14 shown in FIG. 52, the fourth position P4 may be a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300. Even when the fourth position P4 of the movable light guide plate MGP (second movable body) is a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300 as in the modified example 14, the first movable body 300 is in the second position. It is possible to provide a movable body effect in which the movable light guide plate MGP advances to P2 and is located at the fourth position P4 away from the movement path of the first movable body 300, and the effect of the effect can be improved. ..

Further, since the movable body effect can be executed by locating the first movable body 300 that has advanced to the second position and the transparent effect means that has moved to a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300, the player can perform the movable body effect. It is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

Further, although not particularly shown, as a support portion for supporting the first tubular body 252 and the second tubular body 253, which are tubular portions provided in an area other than the window portion 51 of the opening / closing frame 50, for example, the opening / closing frame 50 By providing an LED cover that is projected from the front surface of the window and forms a light emitting portion that emits light by the effect LED 9, the tubular portion is supported by the LED cover as a support portion, so that damage or fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 as the plate-shaped portion is arranged so as to close the opening on the front side of the tubular portion, and the entire area of the game area 10 can be visually recognized through the front transmission plate 251. The front transmission plate 251 as a plate-shaped portion is composed of a first plate-shaped portion that closes an opening on the front side of the tubular portion and a second plate-shaped portion that is arranged outside the tubular portion. It may be configured.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front transmission plate 251 is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following modifications 15 and 16 are described. As shown in the above, the front transmission plate 251 may be arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261. Further, only a part of the front transmission plate 251 may be inclined and the other parts may be arranged in parallel.

(Modification 15)
Here, the modified example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. 53 is a vertical cross-sectional view showing the window unit of the modified example 15 in FIGS. 53A and 53B.

As shown in the modified example 5 shown in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (B), the front transmission plate 251 includes a first plate-shaped portion 251A that closes the opening on the front side of the tubular body 252A as a tubular portion, and a tubular body. It may be composed of a second plate-shaped portion 251B arranged outside the 252A.

Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the first plate-shaped portion 251A is arranged so as to be inclined with respect to the rear transmission plate 261, and the second plate-shaped portion 251B is arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261. You may. Further, as shown in FIG. 53B, both the first plate-shaped portion 251A and the second plate-shaped portion 251B may be arranged substantially parallel to the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R arranged below the first movable body 300 are positioned in front of the rear transparent plate 261 even when they are moved to the effect position. Although the embodiment provided so as not to be provided is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the front transmission plate 251 is arranged so as to incline downward toward the rear side, the first The movable body 300 can be moved to the front side until a predetermined portion of the main body portion 302 is located closer to the front transparent plate 251 than the rear transparent plate 261 via the hole 270 of the rear transparent plate 261, and the second movable body Even if the 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R can be moved to the front side through the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261 until the predetermined portion is located closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261. Good.

In this case, when each movable body is moved to the effect position, the first predetermined portion of the first movable body 300 is on the front side of the predetermined portion of the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R. It is preferable to be located at. By doing so, the movement amounts of the first movable body 300 and the second movable body (second movable body 400 and third movable body 500L, 500R) can be made different according to the inclination of the front transmission plate 251. ..

Further, when the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are located below the player's line-of-sight position when moved to the effect position, they are on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261. When the player moves to, the movable body moved to the effect position may make it difficult to see the game area 10 (particularly, the starting winning opening, the large winning opening, etc.) below the movable body. Therefore, as described above, the second movable body 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R below the first movable body 300 are moved so as not to protrude to the front side of the first movable body 300 at the effect position. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the lower gaming area 10 from being lowered.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the front surface of the front transmission plate 251 as a plate-like portion is formed in a flat surface shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the front transmission plate 251 is not limited to this, and has a non-flat surface shape (for example, It may be formed in a curved surface shape, a spherical shape, etc.).

(Modification 16)
Next, a modification 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 54. 54A and 54B are vertical cross-sectional views showing a state in which the window unit of the modified example 16 is located at the first viewing position, and FIG. 54B is a vertical cross section showing a state in which the window unit is moved to the second viewing position. It is a figure.

In the above embodiment, the window unit 51A is provided so as to be immovable with the tubular portion projecting forward with respect to the opening / closing frame 50, but the present invention is not limited thereto. However, for example, like the first transmissive body 250 of the window unit 51B of the modified example 16, the front transmissive plate 251 is substantially parallel to the rear transmissive plate 261 at a position separated forward from the rear transmissive plate 261. The lower side portion between the first visible position (see FIG. 54 (A)) and the second visible position (see FIG. 54 (B)) in which the upper end is inclined forward with respect to the rear transparent plate 261. It may be provided so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 280 that faces in the left-right direction.

In this case, since the first transmissive body 250, which is a part of the window unit 51B, is provided so as to project toward the player from the first visible position to the second visible position, the player can perform the first transmissive. It is difficult to see that the body 250 has moved to the second visual position. However, when the first movable body 300 moves forward in response to the movement of the first transparent body 250 to the second visual position, it becomes easier to recognize that the first transparent body 250 has moved. Specifically, for example, by changing the tilt angle of the front transmission plate 251, the angle of incidence of the light emitted from the movable LED 350A on the front transmission plate 251 changes, which causes the back surface of the front transmission plate 251 to change. The light reflected by the player increases, and not only the front surface of the game area 10 in the rear is illuminated, but also the amount of light emitted in the front is reduced, so that the visibility of the game area 10 from the player side is improved.

Further, the first movable body 300 also returns to the rear side according to the movement of the first transparent body 250 from the second visible position to the first visible position, so that the effect of the effect is improved. Further, when the incident angle of the external light R with respect to the front transmission plate 251 changes, the light reflected by the front transmission plate 251 also changes, and the first movable body 300 and the game area 10 can be visually recognized through the front transmission plate 251. By changing the aspect, it becomes easy to recognize that the first transmissive body 250 has moved forward.

Further, since the movable body also pops out to the player side together with the first transparent body 250, an impact can be given. Further, since the lower side of the first transmissive body 250 does not move, it is possible to avoid obstructing other parts (for example, throwing the game ball into the upper plate 90 below).

In the modified example 16, as shown in FIG. 54, it is possible to execute a transmission member operation effect in which only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side, but in addition to this, the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 can be executed. It may be possible to execute the transparent member operation effect in which both of the above and the above are operated on the player side.

For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modified example 16 shown in FIG. 55, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether it is a pattern (S501). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B is (S501; Yes), the type of the frame operation effect is determined (S501A). For example, in the processing of S501A, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the frame operation effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the frame operation effect determination table shown in FIG. 55 (B). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the frame motion effect, and if there is execution, the motion pattern.

As shown in FIG. 55 (B), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, the "one-sided transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission body 250 protrudes)" is determined with a probability of 70%, and "both". The transmission member operation pattern (the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 project) ”is determined with a probability of 30%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the "one-sided transmission member operation pattern (only the first transmission body 250 protrudes)" is determined with a probability of 30%, and the "both transmission member operation pattern (both transmission member operation patterns). The first permeator 250 and the second permeator 260 protrude) ”is determined with a 70% probability. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, it is easier to execute the frame movement effect by both transparent member movement patterns than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, and the frame movement by both transparent member movement patterns. With regard to the production, you can have a sense of expectation of a big hit, and the interest of the game will improve. Further, even in the case of the super reach A (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the one-sided transparent member operation pattern is executed, the big hit is expected for the frame operation effect by the one-sided transparent member operation pattern (only the first transparent body 250 protrudes). You can have a feeling and the fun of the game will improve.

After the processing of S501A, the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). For example, in the processing of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating a random number for determining the movable body effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 55 (C). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 55 (C), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 10%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is 20%. It is determined by the probability, and "the second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, the movable body production is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTB-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is more than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 33 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, also in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. 33. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the production of a movable body that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B but also in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach may include a fluctuation pattern having a pseudo-continuous fluctuation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

Returning to FIG. 55 (A), after the processing of S502, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504). After the processing of S504, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not the super reach fluctuation pattern (S501; No), when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

In the modified example 16, at least the transparent member operation effect of operating the first transparent body 250 toward the player side can be executed, and by executing this transparent member operation effect, the first movable body 300 is moved to the first transparent body. Since it is movable between the 250 and the second transmissive body 260, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, the transmission member operation effect is an effect of operating only the first transparent body 250 on the player side, or an effect of operating both the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 on the player side. , It is possible to provide a powerful transparent member operation effect to the player. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, as a transmission member operation effect, only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side, while both the transmission member operation pattern and the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are operated on the player side. There are both transmission member operation patterns, and one transmission member operation pattern and both transmission member operation patterns have different expectations (for example, jackpot expectations) that are controlled in an advantageous state. Can be watched. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the first movable body 300 is referred to as the first transparent body 250 based on the execution of the transparent member motion effect and the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.). It may be movable to and from the second transmissive body 260. In this case, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the first motion pattern in which the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 moves between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260, and the transmission member operation effect is executed to perform the first movable body. A second motion pattern in which the body 300 does not move between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 may be feasible. In this case, it is possible to give variation to the movable body production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the movable body production. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved. Further, since the degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state differs between the first motion pattern and the second motion pattern, the player can be watched for the movable body effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the normal winning ball device 6A or the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the game At least one of the light emitting components (LEDs) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the board 2) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the movement effect of the transparent member. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) may be turned off or may be made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. Good. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the movement effect of the transparent member. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, when the transmission member operation effect is executed, the window side light emitting component of the window portion 51 may be turned on or may be made to emit light with a higher brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. In this case, the transparent member operation effect can be made conspicuous. Therefore, the player can pay attention to the movement effect of the transparent member. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, it is provided with a detecting means (for example, a position sensor for the first transparent body) for detecting that the first transparent body 250 has operated on the player side, and detects that the first transparent body 250 has operated on the player side. If so, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be executed. In this case, a series of movable body effects in which the first movable body 300 moves between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 after the first transparent body 250 operates toward the player side is appropriate. Can be executed. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved. Further, when the first transparent body 250 is not operating on the player side, the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, so that the first transparent body 250 and the first transparent body 250 1 Damage to the movable body 300 can be prevented.

(Modification 17)
As in the modified example 17 shown in FIG. 56, the opening / closing frame 50 (frame body) includes movable frame-side movable bodies SL and SR (frame-side movable means). The frame-side movable bodies SL and SR can be displaced into a non-protruding state shown by a broken line in FIG. 57 (A) and a protruding state shown by a solid line in FIG. 57 (A) by a drive mechanism for a frame-side movable body (not shown). It has become. Further, a frame interlocking effect (simply referred to as an interlocking effect) for operating the frame side movable bodies SL and SR in connection with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 May be made feasible. In this frame interlocking effect, the timing at which the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing at which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR start operating are combined. It has become. That is, the first operation ACT2 to the second position P2 of the first movable body 300 and the operation in which the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are in the protruding state shown by the solid line in FIG. 57 (A) are synchronized. It is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect having an excellent interlocking feeling when the operation starts.

For example, in the movable body effect setting process (S323A) of the modified example 17 shown in FIG. 58, the effect control CPU 120 changes the super reach B based on the change pattern indicated by the change pattern designation command from the main board 11. It is determined whether it is a pattern (S501). When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B is (S501; Yes), the presence / absence and type of the movable body effect are determined (S502). For example, in the process of S502, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the movable body effect, and uses the extracted numerical data and the movable body effect determination table shown in FIG. 58 (B). Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 58 (B), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 15%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)". Is determined with a probability of 55%, and "second operation pattern PTB-2 (second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 30% with "execution". On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, "without execution" is 10%, and "with execution" is "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is 20%. It is determined by the probability, and "the second operation pattern PTB-2 (the second operation ACT2 after the first operation ACT1)" is determined with a probability of 70% in "execution". In the case of a big hit, the movable body production is easier to be executed than in the case of a loss, and it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit in the movable body production, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the movable body of the "second movement pattern PTB-2 (second movement ACT2 after the first movement ACT1)" is more than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern. The effect is easy to be executed, and the movable body effect in which the first movable body 300 executes the second operation ACT2 shown in FIG. 33 can have a big hit expectation, and the interest of the game is improved. Further, also in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, since the "first operation pattern PTB-1 (first operation ACT1 only)" is executed, the first movable body 300 performs the first operation shown in FIG. 33. It is possible to have a sense of expectation of a big hit in the production of a movable body that executes ACT1, and the interest of the game is improved.

It should be noted that the movable body effect may be executed not only in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B but also in the fluctuation pattern of the super reach A. Further, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach may include a fluctuation pattern having a pseudo-continuous fluctuation. For example, regarding the determination of the movable body effect, the determination ratio may be set so that the degree of expectation increases as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The determination ratio may be set differently depending on whether or not it is a big hit and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations.

After the processing of S502, it is determined whether or not the movable body effect is determined to be present (S503). When it is determined that the movable body effect is present (S503; Yes), the movable body effect flag indicating that the movable body effect is executed is set to the on state (S504).

After the processing of S504, it is determined whether or not the second operation pattern PTB-2 is determined (S504A). When the second operation pattern PTB-2 is determined (S504A; Yes), the type of the frame-side movable body effect, which is the effect of operating the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR, is determined (S504B). For example, in the process of S504B, the effect control CPU 120 extracts the numerical data indicating the random number for determining the frame side movable body effect, and also extracts the extracted numerical data and for determining the frame side movable body effect shown in FIG. 58 (C). Using the table, it is determined whether or not to execute the frame-side movable body effect, and if there is execution, the operation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 58 (C), in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, the "non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)" is determined with an 80% probability, and the "interlocking pattern (interlocking pattern) The first movable body 300 and the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are linked) ”is determined with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, the "non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)" is determined with a 20% probability, and the "interlocking pattern (first movable body 300)" is determined. And the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are linked) ”is determined with an 80% probability. In the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, it is easier to execute the frame movement effect by the interlocking pattern than in the case of the super reach B (loss) fluctuation pattern, and the first movable body 300 and the frame side movable body SL ， You can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit about the interlocking production that is linked with SR, and the fun of the game will be improved. In addition, even in the case of the super reach B (big hit) fluctuation pattern, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of a big hit for the non-interlocking effect in which only the first movable body 300 operates without the frame side movable bodies SL and SR operating. , The fun of the game is improved.

After the processing of S504B, a movable body effect pattern corresponding to the type of movable body effect determined in S502 is set (S505). That is, the operation pattern PTB-1 or PTB-2 determined in S502 is set. When it is determined in S501 that the pattern is not the super reach fluctuation pattern (S501; No), when there is no movable body effect in S503 (S503; No), or after the process of S505, the movable body effect setting process is performed. finish.

In the modification 17, it is possible to execute the frame interlocking effect of operating the frame side movable means of the frame body in relation to the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful frame-linked effect. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced.

Further, when the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, an interlocking pattern that operates the frame-side movable means and a non-interlocking pattern that does not operate the frame-side movable means. Is feasible, so that the frame-linked production can have variations, and the interest of the frame-linked production can be improved. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, since the degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs between the interlocking pattern and the non-interlocking pattern, the player can be watched for the frame interlocking effect. Thereby, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, since the timing at which the first movable body 300 enters between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 and the timing at which the operation of the frame-side movable means is started are matched, both operations are started. It is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect with an excellent interlocking feeling. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

The timing of returning the first movable body 300 that has entered between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 may be matched with the timing of returning before the operation of the frame-side movable means. In this case, it is possible to provide a frame interlocking effect having an excellent interlocking feeling when both operations are completed. Therefore, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, at least a part of the frame body operating means (for example, the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 56) in connection with the first movable body 300 entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. It may be possible to execute a frame-linked effect in which is operated. Here, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), at least a part of the ball striking operation handle HB is projected. The operation of the operating means may be, for example, at least one of vibration, rocking, advancing, retreating, and moving at least a part of the operating means (for example, the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 56). .. According to this, since the operation of the operating means is directly transmitted to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a more powerful frame-linked effect. Therefore, the effect of the production can be enhanced. The operation means is not limited to the ball striking operation handle HB, and may be a stick controller 31A, a push button 31B, or the like.

Further, based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means (for example, the controller sensor unit 35A, the push sensor 35B, etc.), the first movable body 300 is placed between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. It may be possible to enter. In this case, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the player can participate in the game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Modification 18)
As in the modified example 18 shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250. The size is different between when it is located between the second transmissive body 260 and the second transmissive body 260. For example, in the first movable body 300, the upper portion of the first movable body 300 can advance upward, and the lower portion of the first movable body 300 can advance downward, and can be expanded in the vertical direction. Is to be. Specifically, when the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, for example, when it is at the first position P1, the hole portion 270 of the second transparent body 260 (FIG. 6). The length LW in the vertical direction is smaller than the opening diameter (length LY in the vertical direction of the opening) of the hole portion 270 formed in the rear transmission plate 261 shown in the above, and is the vertical direction at the position immediately before entering the hole portion 270. When the length of is LX (however, each length is LY>LX> LW) and is located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, the opening diameter of the hole 270 (of the opening). The length LZ in the vertical direction is larger than the length LY in the vertical direction. For example, the first movable body 300 is extended in the vertical direction to a length LZ after coming out of the hole 270. When the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the first movable body 300 may be directed from the first position P1 toward the second position P2 at a constant speed, or may be a hole. The speed may be gradually increased until it enters the portion 270, and after entering the hole portion 270, it may move at a higher speed.

According to the modification 18, when the size of the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, and when the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are located. Since it is different from when it is located in between, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable body. In particular, when the first movable body 300 is not located between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the first movable body 300 is smaller than the opening diameter of the hole 270, but the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. When it is located between and, it becomes larger than the opening diameter of the hole 270, so that the player can show the enlarged first movable body 300, and it is possible to provide a more powerful movable body effect. it can.

(Modification 19)
As in the modified example 19 shown in FIG. 60, the first movable body 300 becomes smaller when entering the hole 270 of the second transparent body 260, and the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 The size is larger than that of the hole 270 both when it is not located between the holes and when it is located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260. For example, the first movable body 300 has a vertical length of LZ when it is not located between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 (for example, when it is at the first position P1), and the first The vertical length when located between the transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 (for example, when it is at the second transmissive body P2) is also LZ, and both are larger than the hole portion 270 (hole portion). The opening diameter of 270 (larger than the vertical length LY of the opening). If the first movable body 300 is larger than the hole 270, the first position P1 and the second position P2 are the same. It does not have to be the size.

According to the modified example 19, the first movable body 300, which was larger than the opening diameter of the hole 270, once became smaller than the opening diameter of the hole 270, passed through the hole 270, and reached the second position P2. Since it is larger than the opening diameter of the hole portion 270, it is possible to provide a movable body effect that is unexpected to change. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the movable body.

In the modified examples 18 and 19, the first movable body 300 is expanded in the vertical direction, but it may be expanded in at least one of the vertical, horizontal, and diagonal directions, or deformed. Good. Further, at least a part of the first movable body 300 is configured to be rotatable around the advance direction as a rotation axis, and when it is rotated in the clockwise direction, the first movable body 300 is expanded to the outer peripheral side by the rotation in the clockwise direction (for example, the first movable body 300). 1 When the blade portion of the movable body 300 advances in the radial direction or the circumferential direction, and conversely rotates counterclockwise, the outer peripheral side is reduced by the counterclockwise rotation (for example, the first The blades of the movable body 300 may be housed in the direction of the center of rotation or the circumferential direction).

Further, as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the window portion 51 for visually recognizing the game area 10, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y provided so as to be operable, and the effect display device 5X , 5Y is provided, and the window portion 51 is arranged on the game region 10 side of the first transmissive body 250 and the first transmissive body 250, and a hole portion 270 is formed. The effect control CPU 120 having the second transmissive body 260 has the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in the standby state at the position on the back side of the rear transmission plate 261, and the predetermined portions of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are rear. It is possible to execute the third control of moving the transmission plate 261 through the hole 270 to the front side of the transmission plate 261 until it is located closer to the front transmission plate 251.

By doing so, it is possible to move the predetermined portions of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y until they are located closer to the first transmissive body 250 than the rear transmissive plate 261 of the second transmissive body 260. Since it is possible to give more impact to the person, the effect of the production can be improved.

Further, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be moved to a position closer to the front transmission plate 251 than the rear transmission plate 261 while the display unit is slightly inclined so as to face the center side. By doing so, the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be preferably shown.

Further, after executing the third control, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in a direction (horizontal direction) intersecting the movement direction (front-back direction) in the third control. Control is feasible. By doing so, the display content of the display unit can be made visible to anyone other than the player.

Further, as described above, the rear transmission plate 261 is arranged to face the front side of the board surface plate 200 so that the game ball can flow down from the game board surface 200A, and the game ball is arranged between the rear transmission plate 261 and the game board surface 200A. The hole 270 is formed at a position corresponding to the effect region (opening 2c formed in the board plate 200) that does not correspond to the flow region of the game ball in the game region 10 because it forms the flow region of the game. That is, since it is necessary to secure a flow area of the game ball, there is a limit in increasing the size of the hole 270, and in order for the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to pass through the hole 270, the effect display device 5X, 5Y cannot be larger than the hole 270.

Therefore, as in the present invention, after performing the third control for moving the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side, at least a part of a predetermined portion of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y (the whole in the present embodiment) is displayed. By performing the fourth control of moving the hole 270 in a direction (left-right direction) different from the moving direction (forward direction) in the first control on the front side of the second transmissive body 260, the hole 270 is not enlarged more than necessary. Moreover, since the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be shown at a position closer to the player on the front side than the rear transmission plate 261, it is possible to provide the player with a more powerful effect.

Further, in order to move the left and right effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the front side via the hole portion 270, the hole portion 270 is made larger than necessary because it is once moved toward the center and then passed through the hole portion 270. It is possible to pass through the effect display devices 5X and 5Y without any problems. Then, after passing through the hole portion 270, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y can be further moved in the left-right direction, so that the desired position (for example, the central effect display) is not limited to the position of the hole portion 270. The image displayed on the display unit can be shown at a position that does not interfere with the visibility of the device 5A or is concealed. Further, since the effect display device 5A is located behind the effect display devices 5X and 5Y after the movement, a sense of depth can be generated.

Further, since the display units of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged in front of the game area 10 by executing the third control, for example, they are provided at predetermined positions as well as notifications such as left-handed and right-handed. A notification image or the like for aiming and launching a game ball toward a winning area can be displayed from the front side of the game area 10 and near the target location.

Further, the rail member (not shown) that guides the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y is produced when changing from the standby state to the first operating state and when changing from the first operating state to the second operating state. It functions as a contact prevention means for preventing contact between the display devices 5X and 5Y and the rear transmission plate 261. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect display devices 5X and 5Y from coming into contact with the rear transmission plate 261 of the second transmission body 260 and being damaged.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an example of the display device, a mode in which the effect display devices 5X and 5Y auxiliary provided on the side of the effect display device 5A capable of variable display of the effect symbol are applied has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and the display device may target the effect display device 5A, or a display device for effect (for example, movable) provided separately from the effect display devices 5A, 5X, 5Y. It may be a display device mounted on the body or the like). Further, the display device for the effect connected to the effect control board 12 in this way is not limited to the first special symbol display 4A, the second special symbol display 4B, the normal symbol display 20, and the first hold display 25A. , Second hold display 25B, normal figure hold display 25C, and various other display devices connected to the main board 11.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the third control, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The display mode of the display screen is changed according to the movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y (for example, the image is enlarged or the design or character is enlarged according to the forward movement of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y). By performing display control (such as moving or changing the background color), it is possible to improve the effect of the effect by moving the display device and changing the display image.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are changed to the first operating state, the entire effect display devices 5X and 5Y are located in front of the rear transmission plate 261. The present invention is not limited to this, and only predetermined parts (for example, display parts) of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be located in front of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the fourth control, after moving the effect display devices 5X and 5Y in the left-right direction, the display unit is rotated so as to face outward. The display unit of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y may be rotated along the front transmission plate 251, and by doing so, the display unit may be moved closer to the player side. It becomes possible to get closer.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are provided so as to be movable substantially in parallel in the front-back and left-right directions, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the third control May be moved so as to incline upward or downward in the front-rear direction. Further, in the fourth control, it may be moved upward or downward.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the embodiment in which only the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect display device 5A and others. The display device may be moved to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y as movable bodies are provided on the back side of the game board 2 in the non-operating state, but the present invention is limited thereto. Instead, the board surface plate 200 may be provided on the front side of the game board surface 200A.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are arranged at positions corresponding to the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 10 when viewed from the front after the execution of the fourth control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, except for the position corresponding to the flow-down area of the game ball in the game area 10 when viewed from the front after the execution of the fourth control (position corresponding to the effect area). That is, it is preferable to move the effect display devices 5X and 5Y within the region corresponding to the hole 270.

Further, by doing so, as described with reference to the movable body as an example in FIG. 22, for example, an operation error occurs during the operation of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y, that is, during the execution of the third control and the fourth control. Even when it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance, the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transparent plate 261. Therefore, the rear transparent plate 261 and the effect display device can be opened. It is possible to prevent the 5X and 5Y from being damaged.

In the above-described embodiment, since the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved within the region corresponding to the hole 270, the opening / closing frame 50 can be opened without contacting the rear transmission plate 261. The present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the opening / closing frame 50 does not come into contact with the second transmissive body when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened / closed.

For example, a door opening detection switch (not shown) for detecting the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 is connected to the main board 11, and the main board 11 detects the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 by the door opening detection switch. Based on this, the door opening designation command indicating that the opening / closing frame 50 has been opened is transmitted to the effect control board 12. Then, the effect control CPU 120 may control the effect display devices 5X and 5Y to move to the standby position when the door opening designated command is received while the third control or the fourth control is being executed. Good.

According to this, for example, when the third control or the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y is being executed, an operation abnormality of the effect display devices 5X, 5Y occurs, and the effect display devices 5X, 5Y Even if it becomes necessary to open the opening / closing frame 50 for maintenance due to immobility on the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 or ball clogging in the game area 10, the opening / closing frame 50 can be used. When the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are opened, they are retracted toward a position where they do not come into contact with the rear transmission plate 261 (for example, a standby position), so that the rear transmission plate 261 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are prevented from being damaged. it can.

Further, when the opening / closing frame 50 is opened, even if the game ball that has stayed in the beaded state due to ball clogging falls, it is moved to the front side of the rear transmission plate 261 by the third control, that is, to the front side of the game area 10. By retracting the moving effect display devices 5X and 5Y to the standby position side, it is possible to prevent the dropped game ball from colliding with the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. Therefore, the effect display device 5X due to the collision with the game ball. , 5Y can be prevented from being damaged, or the game ball can be prevented from bouncing due to a collision with the effect display devices 5X and 5Y and entering the back side of the board surface plate 200 through the opening 2c of the board surface plate 200.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 issues a door opening designation command when executing the first control or the second control of the first movable body 300, or the third control or the fourth control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. When received, not only the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y are moved to the standby position, but also the running effect display is interrupted so that at least the first movable body 300 and the effect display devices 5X and 5Y move. A notification that restricts the opening of the opening / closing frame 50 (for example, "Please do not open the opening / closing frame" is output or a message is sent to the effect display devices 5X, 5Y, etc. until it moves to the rear side of the rear transmission plate 261. (Display or display) may be performed.

Further, a lock mechanism or the like for locking the opening / closing frame 50 in the closed state is provided, and the effect control CPU 120 is used for the first control and the second control of the first movable body 300, or the third control of the effect display devices 5X and 5Y. When the door opening designation command is received while the fourth control is being executed, the door may be locked by the lock mechanism to restrict the opening of the opening / closing frame 50.

(A1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the first operation that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 allows the first movable body 300 to move to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33. The first action ACT1 that moves to and the second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),
The operating speeds of the first operation and the second operation are different (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (A), the first speed V1 in the first operation and the second speed V2 in the second operation are different, etc. ).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A2) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
Light emitting means (for example, movable LED 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.)
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the first operation that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 allows the first movable body 300 to move to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33. The first action ACT1 that moves to and the second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),
The light emitting mode of the light emitting means associated with the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (B), in the first light emitting mode I1 and the second operation in the first operation. (For example, different from the second light emission mode I2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A3) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
Sound output means capable of outputting directing sound (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the first operation that operates at a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates at the second position can be executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 allows the first movable body 300 to move to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33. The first action ACT1 that moves to and the second action ACT2 that moves to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.),
The effect sound of the sound output means associated with the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 34 (C), the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) in the first operation ACT1. ) And the second production sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) in the second operation ACT2 are different).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A4) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A3) above,
A display means capable of executing a display effect (for example, an effect display device 5A or the like) is visibly arranged through the window portion.
The movable body can be positioned at an origin position where the movable body is not superimposed on the display means or a part thereof is superimposed on the display means, and can operate from the origin position to the first position or the second position. Yes, you may.
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(A5) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A4) above,
Specific game information display means (for example, at least one of a small symbol, a fourth symbol, a right-handed display, a hold display, etc.) related to a game regardless of the position of the movable body. , The specific game information display area 5Z of FIG. 1 and the like) may be provided.
According to this configuration, not only can a powerful movable body effect be provided, but also specific game information related to the game, that is, game information important to the player can be always shown to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent important game information from becoming invisible due to the movable body effect.

(A6) In the game machine of (A1) above,
The operating speed of the second operation may be higher than the operating speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 34A is larger than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(A7) In the game machine of (A1) above,
The operating speed of the second operation may be smaller than the operating speed of the first operation (for example, the second speed V2 in FIG. 34 (A) is smaller than the first speed V1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce failures due to the second operation of the movable body.

(A8) In the game machine of (A2) above,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body.
The second operation may have a lower emission brightness of the light emitting means than the first operation (for example, the second brightness I2 in FIG. 34B is smaller than the first brightness I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to reduce glare when approaching the player side.

(A9) In the game machine of (A2) above,
The light emitting means is provided on the movable body.
The second operation may have a higher emission brightness of the light emitting means than the first operation (for example, the second brightness I2 in FIG. 34B is larger than the first brightness I1). ..
According to this configuration, it is possible to make the player dazzle when approaching the player side, and it is possible to provide a light emitting effect with an impact.

(A10) In the game machine of (A3) above,
In the second operation, at least one of the loud volume, the high pitch, and the fast tempo of the effect sound of the sound output means can be executed as compared with the case of the first operation (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 34 (C) may be larger than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(A11) In the game machine of (A3) above,
In the second operation, at least one of the fact that the volume of the effect sound of the sound output means is lower, the pitch is lower, and the tempo is slower than in the case of the first operation can be executed (for example, FIG. The second effect sound mode (volume Vo2) of 34 (C) may be smaller than the first effect sound mode (volume Vo1).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide a powerful movable body effect.

(A12) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A11) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating is different from the second opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened when the movable body is not operating. It may be.
According to this configuration, when the opening / closing door is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be executed according to the presence / absence of operation of the movable body.

(A13) In any of the game machines (A1) to (A12) above,
A control means for controlling the movable body (for example, an effect control CPU 120) is provided.
The control means
A first control (for example, an effect) of moving a predetermined portion of the movable body toward the first transmissive member side through the hole portion or the notch portion until the predetermined portion is located closer to the first transmissive member side than the second transmissive member. In the control CPU 120, the first movable body 300 in the first standby position has a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 via the hole 270 of the rear transmission plate 261. The part where the first control of moving to the front side until it is located on the front transmission plate 251 side of 261) and
After executing the first control, a second control for moving at least a part of the predetermined portion in a direction intersecting the moving direction in the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executed the first control). After that, the direction (front) in which the first protruding portion 303, which is a part of the predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body portion 302, intersects the moving direction (front lower direction) in the first control. A portion capable of executing the second control for moving upward), or a second protrusion which is a part of a predetermined portion (front half) on the surface A side (front side) of the main body 302 after executing the first control. A portion capable of executing a second control for moving the unit 304 in a direction (front-up direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front-down direction) in the first control) and
It is possible to do so.
According to this configuration, after performing the first control for moving the movable body to the first transmission member side, at least a part of the predetermined portion is moved on the first transmission member side of the second transmission member side in the first control. By performing the second control of moving in a direction different from the direction, the player can give an impact, so that the effect of the effect can be improved.

(A14) In the game machine of the above (A13)
At least a part of the predetermined portion moves in a direction different from the game area in the second control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is one of the predetermined portions (front half) of the main body 302 in the second control. The first protruding portion 303 and the second protruding portion 304, which are the portions, may be moved in a direction (front upward direction) intersecting with the movement direction (front lower direction) in the first control).
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body in the second control can be preferably shown.

(A15) In the game machine of (A13) or (A14) above,
Supporting means for supporting the movable body in response to the movement of the movable body (for example, in the first operation mode, the second movable body 400 and the third movable body 500L, 500R supporting the first movable body 300, and the second In the operation mode, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. that supports the first movable body 300 may be provided.
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body and the posture after the movement can be stabilized.

(A16) In any of the game machines (A13) to (A15) above,
A second movable body (for example, a second movable body 400, a third movable body 500L, 500R, a fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc.) different from the movable body (for example, the first movable body 300) is provided.
The control means can control to move the second movable body to the movable body so as to be unitable after the first control is performed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is after the first control is performed). , A portion capable of controlling the movement of the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, the fourth movable body 600L, 600R, etc. to the first movable body 300).
According to this configuration, since the movable body and the second movable body support each other by the union, the posture after movement can be stabilized.

(A17) In the game machine of the above (A16)
When the second movable body is combined with the movable body, at least a part of the second movable body is arranged closer to the game area than the second transmission member (for example, the second in the first operation mode). When the movable bodies 400 and the third movable bodies 500L and 500R are combined with the first movable body 300, and when the fourth movable bodies 600L and 600R are combined with the first movable body 300 in the second operation mode, these second The movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body 600L, 600R are the portions arranged behind the rear transmission plate 261 (see FIGS. 17 and 18). It may be.
According to this configuration, the movable body and the second movable body are located at different positions in the moving direction of the movable body in the first control when they are combined, so that a sense of depth can be generated.

(A18) In any of the game machines (A13) to (A17) above,
The window portion (for example, the window portion 51) can open and close the game area (for example, the game area 10) (see FIG. 3).
The movable body may not come into contact with the second transmissive member when opening and closing the window portion (see FIG. 22).
According to this configuration, damage to the movable body and the second transparent member can be prevented.

(A19) In any of the game machines (A13) to (A18) above,
The movable body is provided with light emitting means (for example, movable body LEDs 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) capable of irradiating light toward other than the first transmitting member after performing the first control. (See FIG. 20).
According to this configuration, it is possible to appeal the production not only to the player but also to the surroundings.

(A20) In any of the game machines (A13) to (A19) above,
A game machine frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) having a game board (for example, a game board 2) for forming the game area (for example, a game area 10), and
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that is provided to be openable / closable with respect to the game machine frame and has the window portion (for example, the window portion 51).
A light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9) provided in an area other than the window portion of the opening / closing frame.
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls light emission of the opening / closing door side light emitting component, and
With
The light emitting control means changes the light emitting mode according to the movement of the movable body (for example, the effect control CPU 120 includes the first movable body 300, the second movable body 400, the third movable body 500L, 500R, and the fourth movable body. A portion capable of changing the light emitting mode of the effect LED 9 to the first to fifth light emitting modes according to the operation of the movable bodies 600L and 600R. See FIG. 19).
According to this configuration, the movement of the movable body can be preferably produced.

(A21) In the game machine of the above (A20)
After performing the first control, the light emission control means lowers the brightness as compared with that before performing the first control (for example, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect LED 9 to emit light in the first light emission mode. Later, a portion for controlling light emission in a second light emitting mode having a lower brightness than the first light emitting mode (see FIG. 20) may be used.
According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the transparency of the movable body.

(A22) In any of the game machines (A13) to (A21) above,
A game machine frame (for example, a game machine frame 3) having a game board (for example, a game board 2) for forming the game area (for example, a game area 10), and
An opening / closing frame (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that is provided to be openable / closable with respect to the game machine frame and has the window portion (for example, the window portion 51).
A light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9) provided in an area other than the window portion of the opening / closing frame.
A light emitting control means (for example, a production control CPU 120) that controls light emission of the opening / closing door side light emitting component, and
With
The opening / closing door-side light emitting component is provided so as to be able to irradiate the movable body with light after the first control is performed (for example, the effect LED 9 is a first movable body after the first control is performed. It is provided so that light can be irradiated toward 300. See FIG. 44 (B) of Modification 6).
According to this configuration, the movable body can be made to stand out by light.

(A23) In any of the game machines (A13) to (A22) above,
In the game area (for example, the game area 10), a guide passage (for example, a warp passage 800) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided.
In the guide passage, at least a part of the guide passage passes through the hole portion (for example, the hole portion 271) or the notch portion and is more transparent than the second transmission member (for example, the second transmission body 260). It may be located on the member (for example, the first transmissive body 250) side (see FIG. 43 (A) of the modified example 3).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(A24) In any of the game machines (A13) to (A23) above,
In the game area (for example, the game area 10), a guide passage (for example, a first warp passage 800A, a second warp passage 800B, etc.) for guiding a game medium (for example, a game ball) is provided.
The guide passage is first transmitted until at least a part of the guide passage is located closer to the first transmission member than the second transmission member through the hole (for example, hole 271) or the notch. It may be movable toward the member side (see FIGS. 43 (B) and 43 (C) of the modified example 5).
According to this configuration, the game medium flows down at a position close to the first transmission member, so that the interest of the game is improved.

(B1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The movable body has a first operation that operates from the origin position to a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the first transmission member and the second from the first position. A second operation that operates at a second position that enters between the transparent member and the second operation can be executed (for example, the first movable as shown in FIG. 33 by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172. The body 300 can execute the first operation ACT1 that moves to the first position P1 and the second operation ACT2 that operates to the second position P2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B2) In the game machine of (B1) above
The movable body can return to the origin position without executing the second operation after executing the first operation.
The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state differs between the first operation and the second operation.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B3) In the game machine of (B1) or (B2) above
A game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3), an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50), and a door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing door. With,
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
After the movable body executes the first operation, the second operation of the movable body is restricted based on the opening detection of the opening / closing door by the door opening detecting means.
According to this configuration, damage to the movable body and the second transparent member can be prevented.

(B4) In the game machine of (B3) above
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating (for example, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating in S63 of FIG. 27B) is such that the movable body is operating. This is different from the second opening notification (for example, the normal door opening notification in S65 of FIG. 27 (B)) when the opening / closing door is opened when the door is not open.
According to this configuration, when the opening / closing door is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be executed according to the presence / absence of operation of the movable body.

(B5) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B4) above,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
After the movable body executes the first motion, based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). It is possible to execute an operation effect for executing the second operation of the movable body (based on the operation detection).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(B6) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B5) above,
The movable body can operate at a plurality of timings in the variable display.
At the first timing and the second timing at the plurality of timings, the execution rate at which only the first operation is executed and the execution rate at which the second operation is executed after the execution of the first operation are different (for example). , Only the first operation ACT1 is executed at the execution timing (first timing) of the reach development notice shown in FIG. 35 (A) and the execution timing (second timing) of the jackpot notice shown in FIG. 35 (A). The execution rate is different from the execution rate at which the second operation ACT2 is executed after the execution of the first operation ACT1).
According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(B7) In any of the game machines (B1) to (B6) above,
A display means capable of executing a display effect (for example, an effect display device 5A or the like) is visibly arranged through the window portion.
The origin position is a position where the movable body does not overlap with the display means or a position where only a part of the movable body overlaps with the display means.
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(C1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The game machine accelerates and advances the movable body between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, a rail of a slide plate 301 of the first movable body 300 and a rail of a base member 700). 701 etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C2) In the game machine of (C1) above
The accelerated advance means is a guide member having a downward guide path portion in at least a part of a guide path portion that guides the movable body between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, a first transmission member). The slide plate 301 of the movable body 300 and the rail 701 of the base member 700, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C3) In the game machine of (C2) above
The downward guide path portion is formed in a downward straight line (for example, the linear rail 701 in FIG. 16) or a downward arc shape path (for example, concave arc path RT1 in FIG. 37, convex arc path RT2, etc.). ing.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C4) In the game machine of (C3) above,
The guide path portion is formed so that the movable body can swing (for example, the concave arc-shaped path RT3 in FIG. 38).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C5) In any of the game machines (C1) to (C3) above,
The movable body can advance to an intermediate position of the guide path portion and an advance position advanced from the intermediate position (for example, the intermediate position PS1 and the advance position PS2 in FIG. 39).
The degree of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the movable body advances to the intermediate position or the movable body advances to the advanced position (for example, the first movable body 300 moves to the intermediate position PS1). The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs between the case of advancing and the case of advancing the first movable body 300 to the advance position PS2).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(C6) In any of the game machines (C2) to (C5) above,
The window portion includes a wall portion (for example, wall portions WL, WR, etc. in FIG. 40) extending in a direction connecting the first transmission member and the second transmission member.
The guide path portion has a guide groove or a guide hole (for example, as shown in FIG. 40B) formed in the wall portion along the guide direction of the movable body, and the first movable body 300 is placed at the second position P2. (Downward linear or arcuate guide holes WL1, WR1, etc.) that guide the vehicle.
According to this configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

(C7) In any of the game machines (C1) to (C6) above,
An acceleration support means (for example, a spring member) that supports acceleration of the movable body is provided.
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(C8) In any of the game machines (C1) to (C7) above,
The guide member can advance toward the hole portion or the notch portion (for example, a rail 701 (guide member) is provided between the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 via the hole portion 270. Enter, etc.).
According to this configuration, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful movable body effect.

(C9) In any of the game machines (C1) to (C8) above,
A game machine main body, an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50), a door opening detecting means for detecting the opening of the opening / closing door (for example, a door opening detection switch), and the like. With
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Based on the opening detection of the opening / closing door by the door opening detecting means, the entry of the movable body between the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member is restricted (for example, the opening / closing frame by the door opening detecting switch). Based on the opening detection of 50, the entry of the first movable body 300 between the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body 260 is restricted, etc.).
According to this configuration, damage to the movable body and the second transparent member can be prevented.

(C10) In the game machine of the above (C9)
The first opening notification when the opening / closing door is opened while the movable body is operating (for example, the door opening notification when the movable body is operating in S63 of FIG. 27B) is such that the movable body is operating. This is different from the second opening notification (for example, the normal door opening notification in S65 of FIG. 27 (B)) when the opening / closing door is opened when the door is not open.
According to this configuration, when the opening / closing door is notified of opening, an appropriate measure can be executed according to the presence / absence of operation of the movable body.

(C11) In any of the game machines (C1) to (C10) above,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the movable body is subjected to the first It is possible to perform an operation effect of entering between the 1 transmission member and the second transmission member.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
When the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, a side surface portion (for example, the tubular body 252A of FIG. 44) connecting the first transmission member and the second transmission member is connected. (For example, as shown in FIG. 44B), the light emitted from the effect LED 9 is transmitted through the tubular body 252A and emitted to the first movable body 300 inside the space portion S. By executing (such as the first movable body 300 being light-emittingly decorated), the decorative effect of decorating the movable body can be executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D2) In the game machine of (D1) above,
The predetermined effect is an effect capable of irradiating light from the side surface portion toward the movable body.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D3) In the game machine of (D1) or (D2) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
The second transmitting member has a light incident portion (for example, a light incident portion 260a shown in FIG. 45) on which light can be incident.
The game machine main body has a light emitting component (for example, LED9a or the like) arranged on an opposing portion (for example, the facing portion 3a or the like) facing the light incident portion of the second transmitting member.
The second transmissive member is a light guide portion (for example, a light guide portion 260b, etc.) capable of transmitting light incident on the light incident portion from the light emitting component to the side surface portion through the inside of the second transmissive member. ), And the light from the light guide portion can be emitted from the side surface portion toward the movable body (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, the light from the light guide portion 260b is the tubular body 252A. It can be emitted from the surface on the space portion S side toward the first movable body 300, etc.).
According to this configuration, a decorative effect can be realized without electrically connecting the opening / closing door and the game machine main body.

(D4) In the game machine of (D1) or (D2) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
The opening / closing door includes a light emitting component (for example, LED9a) for causing the side surface portion to emit light.
The light emitting component is electrically connected to the connection cable on the game machine main body side.
Light from the light emitting component can be emitted from the side surface portion toward the movable body.
According to this configuration, the optical path can be secured only on the opening / closing door side, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine main body can be improved.

(D5) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D4) above,
There are a plurality of types of execution patterns for the decorative effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 44B, the effect LED 9 emits light in three types of light emission patterns (a plurality of types of execution patterns) of blue, green, and red. It is possible, etc.),
The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on the type of execution pattern of the decoration effect (for example, the degree of expectation is blue (degree of expectation: small) <green (degree of expectation: medium) <red (degree of expectation:). Large) relationship, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D6) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D5) above,
The movable body can perform a plurality of types of operations when entering between the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, as shown in FIG. 45, rotation of the first movable body 300). , Expansion, rocking, deformation, etc.), the execution pattern of the decorative effect differs depending on the plurality of types of operations (for example, a plurality of types of light emission according to the rotation, expansion, rocking, and deformation of the first movable body 300). Aspects, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D7) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D6) above,
In the game area, a game area side light emitting component (for example, a light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52) different from the light emitting component (for example, LED 9a shown in FIG. 45), a normal winning ball device 6A, or a normal variable winning A light emitting component (LED) of the ball device 6B, at least one of a light emitting component (LED) for emitting light at least a part of the surface of the game board 2, etc.) are arranged.
When the decoration effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the decoration effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D8) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D7) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
On the opening / closing door, a light emitting component on the opening / closing door side (for example, an effect LED 9) different from the light emitting component is arranged.
When the decorative effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the decorative effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D9) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D8) above,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
The predetermined effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). is there.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(D10) In any of the game machines (D1) to (D9) above,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
Based on the detection of the player's movement by the movement detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B), the mode of the predetermined effect is changed. It is possible.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
A specific effect can be executed on the side surface portion connecting the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (for example, as in the modified example 8 shown in FIG. 46 (A), the first transmissive body 250 and the second transmissive body A specific effect can be performed on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion) connecting the body 260).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E2) In the game machine of (E1) above
The side surface portion includes an image display means (for example, an image display means DP shown in FIG. 46 (A)) for displaying an image as the specific effect.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E3) In the game machine of (E1) above,
Equipped with a projection means (for example, a projector) to project an image
By projecting the image from the projection means onto the side surface portion, the specific effect can be executed on the side surface portion (for example, the image from the projector is projected onto the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). Therefore, the specific effect can be executed on the tubular body 252A (side surface portion)).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E4) In the game machine of (E1) above
In the side surface portion, the incident light is guided to the inside to guide the image for the specific effect to the image light guide display means (for example, the guidance of the modification 9 shown in FIG. It is equipped with a light plate GP, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E5) In the game machine of (E1) above
The side surface portion has a light guide member capable of guiding the incident light (for example, the light guide member 260d of the modified example 10 shown in FIG. 47 (A)).
The specific effect is an effect in which a light emitting portion provided on the light guide member emits light, or a corresponding region portion (for example, a drawing) in the side surface portion corresponding to the light emitting portion (for example, the light emitting portion 9b). 47, the corresponding area portion 260e in FIG. 48, etc.) emits light.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E6) In any of the game machines (E1) to (E5) above,
As the specific effect, there are a plurality of types of specific light emission patterns (for example, specific light emission patterns in which at least one of the emission color, the brightness, and the blinking interval is different).
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on the type of the specific light emission pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E7) In the game machine of (E5) above
As the specific effect, as shown in a plurality of types of light emitting mode patterns in which the light emitting modes on the side surface portions are stepwise different (for example, as shown in FIGS. 47 (B) and 48 (B)), the tubular body 252A (side surface portion). There are multiple types of light emission mode patterns in which the light emission modes are stepwise different in
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on the type of the light emission mode pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E8) In any of the game machines (E1) to (E7) above,
In the game area, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2 At least one of the light emitting parts (LEDs) for making at least a part of the light emitted) is arranged.
When the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E9) In any of the game machines (E1) to (E8) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Light emitting parts on the opening / closing door side (for example, the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) are arranged on the opening / closing door.
When the specific effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the specific effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E10) In any of the game machines (E1) to (E9) above,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
The specific effect can be executed based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example, based on the operation detection of the stick controller 31A by the controller sensor unit 35A or the operation detection of the push button 31B by the push sensor 35B). is there.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E11) In the game machine of (E4) or (E5) above
An incident suppressing means for suppressing light from the image light guide display means or the light guide member from being incident on at least one of the first transmitting member and the second transmitting member (for example, shown in FIG. 45). A light-shielding member 260c, a reflective member, etc.) are provided.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(E12) In any of the game machines (E1) to (E11) above,
The window portion includes a main body member to which the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be attached and detached.
According to this configuration, the cost of replacing parts can be reduced, and the maintainability of the window portion is excellent.

(F1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
With the first movable body (for example, the first movable body 300),
A second movable body different from the first movable body (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP of the modified example 13 shown in FIG. 50) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the first movable body can enter through the notch.
The first movable body has a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and a second position that enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. (For example, by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172, the first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33, and the first operation ACT1 and the first The second operation ACT2, which operates at the two positions P2, can be executed, etc.),
The second movable body can be positioned at a third position between the first position and the second position of the first movable body, and when the first movable body is moved to the second position, the second movable body can be positioned. It is movable to a fourth position that does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body to the second position (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is between the first position P1 and the second position P2 of the first movable body 300. It can be positioned at the third position P3 of the above, and when the first movable body 300 is moved to the second position P2, it can be moved to the fourth position P4 which does not interfere with the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2. There is etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F2) In the game machine of the above (F1)
The fourth position is a position closer to the first transmission member than the second position (for example, a position closer to the first transmission body 250 than the second position P2 as shown in FIG. 50) or the first position. It is a position away from the movement path of the movable body (for example, a position away from the movement path of the first movable body 300 as in the modified example 14 shown in FIG. 52).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F3) In the game machine of (F1) or (F2) above,
The second movable body is a transparent effect means (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP in FIGS. 50 and 52) that displays light by guiding light inside.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F4) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F3) above,
The second movable body can be positioned at the third position when the first movable body is located at the first position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F5) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F4) above,
Before moving the first movable body to the second position, the second movable body is moved to the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F6) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F5) above,
A determination means for determining that the second movable body has moved to the fourth position (for example, a third position sensor and a fourth position sensor for detecting the position of the movable light guide plate MGP) is provided.
The movement of the first movable body to the second position can be executed based on the determination by the determination means.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F7) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body can operate at the first position.
According to this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented, and a sense of discomfort with respect to the movable body effect can be reduced.

(F8) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot be moved to the fourth position, the first movable body is not moved to the second position.
According to this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F9) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F6) above,
When the second movable body cannot move to the fourth position, the first movable body is kept stopped.
According to this configuration, damage to the first movable body and the second movable body can be prevented.

(F10) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F6) above,
The degree of expectation to be controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the second movable body is located at the third position or the fourth position (for example, the movable light guide plate MGP is located at the third position P3). The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) differs between when the player is in the position of P4 and when the player is in the fourth position P4.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F11) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F10) above,
In the game area, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2 At least one of the light emitting parts (LEDs) for making at least a part of the light emitted) is arranged.
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the game area side light emitting component is turned off or light is emitted with a lower brightness than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F12) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F11) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Light emitting parts on the opening / closing door side (for example, the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) are arranged on the opening / closing door.
When the second movable body is located at the fourth position, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or light is emitted with a lower brightness than when the second movable body is not located at the fourth position.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(F13) In any of the game machines (F1) to (F12) above,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means, the movement of the second movable body to the fourth position and the movement of the first movable body to the second position can be executed (for example,). , The movement of the movable light guide plate MGP to the fourth position P4 and the movement of the first movable body 300 to the second position P2 are feasible, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
It is possible to execute a transmission member operation effect in which at least the first transmission member of the first transmission member and the second transmission member is operated on the player side (for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (B)). A transmission member operation effect in which only the first transmission body 250 is operated on the player side, a transmission member operation effect in which both the first transmission body 250 and the second transmission body 260 are operated on the player side, etc.),
By executing the transmission member operation effect, the movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, as shown in FIG. 54B). 1 The movable body 300 can be moved between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G2) In the game machine of the above (G1)
The transmission member operation effect is an effect of operating only the first transmission member on the player side, or an effect of operating both the first transmission member and the second transmission member on the player side (for example,). , As shown in FIG. 55 (B), a transmission member operation effect in which only the first transparent body 250 is operated on the player side, and both the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 are operated on the player side. Transparent member operation effect, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that.

(G3) In the game machine of the above (G1)
As the transmission member operation effect, both the transmission member operation pattern in which only the first transmission member is operated on the player side and both the first transmission member and the second transmission member are operated on the player side. There is a transparent member operation pattern,
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs between the one-sided transparent member operation pattern and the both-transparent member operation pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G4) In any of the above (G1) to (G3) gaming machines
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
The movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member based on the execution of the transmission member motion effect and the detection of the player's motion by the motion detection means (for example,). , The first movable body 300 can be moved between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G5) In any of the above (G1) to (G4) gaming machines
The first motion pattern in which the transmission member operation effect is executed and the movable body moves between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and the transmission member operation effect is executed to cause the movable body to move. A second motion pattern that does not move between the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be executed (for example, the transmission member operation effect is executed and the first movable body 300 becomes the first transmission body 250 and the first transmission body 250. The first motion pattern that moves between the two transparent bodies 260 and the second motion in which the transparent member motion effect is executed and the first movable body 300 does not move between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260. Patterns and are feasible, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G6) In the game machine of the above (G5)
The degree of expectation controlled in an advantageous state differs between the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G7) In any of the game machines (G1) to (G6) above,
In the game area, the light emitting component on the game area side (for example, the light emitting component (LED) of the center decorative frame 52, the light emitting component (LED) of the ordinary winning ball device 6A or the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, and the surface of the game board 2 At least one of the light emitting parts (LEDs) for making at least a part of the light emitted) is arranged.
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the game area side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G8) In any of the game machines (G1) to (G7) above,
It is provided with a game machine main body (for example, a game machine frame 3) and an opening / closing door (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) that can be opened / closed with respect to the game machine main body.
The opening / closing door includes the window portion.
Light emitting parts on the opening / closing door side (for example, the effect LED 9 of the opening / closing frame 50) are arranged on the opening / closing door.
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the light emitting component on the opening / closing door side is turned off or is made to emit light with a lower brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G9) In any of the game machines (G1) to (G7) above,
A light emitting component on the window side is arranged on the window portion.
When the transmission member operation effect is executed, the window side light emitting component (for example, the window side light emitting component of the window portion 51) is turned on, or light is emitted with higher brightness than when the transmission member operation effect is not executed. Let me.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(G10) In any of the game machines (G1) to (G9) above,
A detection means (for example, a position sensor for a first transparent body) capable of detecting that the first transparent member has operated on the player side based on the execution of the transparent member operation effect is provided.
Based on the detection by the detection means, the movable body can be moved between the first transmission member and the second transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250 operates toward the player side). When detected, the movement of the first movable body 300 between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260 is executed (for example).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H1) A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, a pachinko gaming machine).
A frame body (for example, an opening / closing frame 50) provided with a window portion (for example, a window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area, and
Movable bodies (for example, first movable body 300) and
With
The window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and a hole portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed. The hole portion has a second transmissive member (for example, a second transmissive body 260) and is formed in a space (for example, a space portion S) formed between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member. Alternatively, at least a part of the movable body can enter through the notch.
The frame body includes movable frame-side movable means (for example, the frame-side movable body SL, SR of the modified example 17 shown in FIG. 56, the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 57 (B), and the like).
It is possible to execute a frame interlocking effect of operating the frame-side movable means in relation to the movable body entering between the first transparent member and the second transparent member (for example, the first movable body 300). In connection with entering between the first transparent body 250 and the second transparent body 260, the frame-side movable body SL, SR, the frame interlocking effect for operating the ball striking operation handle HB, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H2) In the game machine of the above (H1)
When the movable body enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, an interlocking pattern that operates the frame-side movable means and a non-interlocking pattern that does not operate the frame-side movable means are executed. It is possible (for example, "non-interlocking pattern (only the first movable body 300 operates)" and "interlocking pattern (the first movable body 300 and the frame-side movable bodies SL and SR are interlocked)" shown in FIG. 58 (C). "Such).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H3) In the game machine of the above (H2)
The degree of expectation (for example, the degree of expectation of a big hit) controlled in an advantageous state differs between the interlocking pattern and the non-interlocking pattern.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H4) In any of the game machines (H1) to (H3) above,
The timing at which the movable body enters between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member coincides with the timing at which the operation of the frame-side movable means is started.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H5) In any of the game machines (H1) to (H4) above,
The timing of returning the movable body that has entered between the first transmission member and the second transmission member and the timing of returning before the operation of the frame-side movable means are matched.
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H6) In any of the game machines (H1) to (H5) above,
The frame-side movable means is an operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the hitting ball operation handle HB, the stick controller 31A, the push button 31B, etc. shown in FIG. 56).
The operation of the frame-side movable means is that at least a part of the operating means operates (for example, at least a part of the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 56 operates).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H7) In the game machine of the above (H6)
The operation of the operating means is at least one operation of vibration, rocking, advancing, retreating and moving (for example, at least a part of the ball striking operation handle HB shown in FIG. 56 vibrates, swings, advances, etc. At least one movement of retreat and movement, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

(H8) In any of the game machines (H1) to (H7) above,
It is equipped with motion detection means (for example, controller sensor unit 35A, push sensor 35B, etc.) for detecting the motion of the player.
Based on the detection of the player's motion by the motion detecting means, the movable body can enter between the first transmissive member and the second transmissive member (for example, the first movable body 300 is first permeated). It is possible to enter between the body 250 and the second transmissive body 260, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a game ball having a predetermined number of balls is a game machine. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed game machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) has been applied as an example of the game medium, but the present invention is not limited to the spherical game medium, and for example, a non-spherical game such as a medal. It may be a medium.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. It can also be applied to slot machines that can generate prizes.

In the case of a slot machine, the gaming area of the present invention corresponds to, for example, a variable display area in which a variable display of a symbol is executed by a variable display device such as a reel. Further, the display device of the present invention corresponds to a variable display device having the above-mentioned symbol (for example, a reel or a liquid crystal display).

In the embodiment, an example in which the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B is used as the detection means has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and non-contact detection means such as an infrared sensor or contact type detection means such as a touch panel may be used. It may be provided to detect the movement of the player.

The variable display of the identification information (special figure, effect pattern, general figure, etc.) includes the blinking of the identification information. For example, in a special figure, a variable display includes a pattern in which all segments are turned off and a pattern in which at least some segments are turned on (for example, a lost pattern) are alternately repeated. The special symbol that is stopped and displayed in the variable display may be a symbol different from the special symbol that is displayed before the stop display (during fluctuation) (the same applies to the effect symbol and the normal symbol).

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, or the like in which a gaming medium is enclosed and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiment examples described later.

Further, all or a part of the configurations shown in the above-described embodiment and each modification, and the configurations shown in the following embodiment and each modification may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of claims rather than the above description and the description below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine), and has a window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the gaming area can be visually recognized and a movable body (for example, a movable body (for example). (For example, a first movable body 300, etc.), and the window portion is provided on the first transmission member (for example, the first transmission body 250) and the game area side of the first transmission member, and has a hole. It has a second transmission member (for example, a second transmission body 260) in which a portion (for example, a hole portion 270) or a notch portion is formed, and is formed between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. At least a part of the movable body can enter the created space (for example, the space portion S) through the hole portion or the notch portion, and the movable body is the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The first operation that operates at the first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second operation that operates at the second position that enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member can be executed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172 causes the first movable body 300 to operate at the first operation ACT1 that moves to the first position P1 and the second operation P2 as shown in FIG. 33. The second operation ACT2 and the operation speed are different between the first operation and the second operation (for example, the first speed V1 in the first operation as shown in FIG. 34 (A)). And the second speed V2 in the second operation are different), and the frame movable body (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.) provided in the game frame so as to be movable, and the frame. A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.) and a notification effect means (effect display device) for executing a notification effect (notification effect, etc. shown in FIG. 74) for notifying the operation of the frame movable body. The control means includes a first pattern (operation + first pattern of notification, etc.) for operating the frame movable body in relation to the notification effect, and the control means is not related to the notification effect. The movement of the frame movable body is controlled by a second pattern for operating the frame movable body (second pattern of only movement, etc.), and the frame movable body is operated by either the first pattern or the second pattern. Depending on the situation, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 75, during the normal game, the second pattern is executed when the first pattern is executed. (The expectation of a big hit is higher than when the pattern is executed, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation that the frame movable body is controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the interest of the production using the frame movable body provided in the game frame is improved. Can be made to.

Alternatively, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) with a window portion (for example, a window portion 51) capable of visually recognizing the game area and a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300) A light emitting means (for example, movable LED 350A, 350B, 350CL, 350CR, 350DL, 350DR, etc.) is provided, and the window portion has a first transmission member (for example, a first transmission body 250) and the first transmission. It has a second transmission member (for example, a second transmission body 260) provided on the game region side of the member and having a hole (for example, a hole 270) or a notch formed, and the first transmission. At least a part of the movable body can enter the space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the member and the second transmission member through the hole portion or the notch portion, and the movable body can enter. In the first operation that operates in the first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and in the second position that enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation that operates and the second operation that operates can be executed (for example, the first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33 by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172. The first operation ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 operating at the second position P2 are feasible), and the light emitting mode of the light emitting means associated with the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example). , The first light emitting mode I1 in the first operation and the second light emitting mode I2 in the second operation are different as shown in FIG. 34 (B)), and the frame movable provided in the game frame so as to be movable. Notify the body (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.), control means for controlling the operation of the frame movable body (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.), and the operation of the frame movable body. A first pattern that includes a notification effect means (effect display device 909, etc.) that executes a notification effect (notification effect shown in FIG. 74), and the control means operates the frame movable body in relation to the notification effect. The operation of the frame movable body is controlled by (the first pattern of operation + notification, etc.) and the second pattern (second pattern of operation only) that operates the frame movable body without being related to the notification effect. Depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state (big hit game state, etc.) advantageous to the player differs (as shown in FIG. 75). In addition, during the normal game, the second pattern is when the first pattern is executed. The expectation of a big hit is higher than when is executed).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation that the frame movable body is controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the interest of the production using the frame movable body provided in the game frame is improved. Can be made to.

Alternatively, a gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) with a window portion (for example, a window portion 51) in which the game area can be visually recognized and a movable body (for example, the first movable body 300) A sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) capable of outputting a directing sound is provided, and the window portion is formed by a first transmissive member (for example, a first transmissive body 250) and the first transmissive member. Also has a second transmission member (for example, a second transmission body 260) provided on the game region side and having a hole (for example, a hole 270) or a notch formed, and the first transmission member and the first transmission member. At least a part of the movable body can enter the space (for example, the space portion S) formed between the second transmission member and the movable body through the hole or the notch, and the movable body is the movable body. It operates in a first position that does not enter between the first transmission member and the second transmission member, and operates in a second position that enters between the first transmission member and the second transmission member. The second operation can be executed (for example, the first operation in which the first movable body 300 moves to the first position P1 as shown in FIG. 33 by the effect control CPU 120 that executes the processes of S323A and S172. The ACT1 and the second operation ACT2 that operates at the second position P2 are feasible), and the production sound of the sound output means that accompanies the operation differs between the first operation and the second operation (for example,). As shown in FIG. 34 (C), the first effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo1) in the first operation ACT1 and the second effect sound mode (for example, volume Vo2) in the second operation ACT2 are different, and further. A frame movable body (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.) provided so as to be operable in the game frame, a control means for controlling the operation of the frame movable body, and (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.). ), The notification effect means (effect display device 909, etc.) for executing the notification effect (notification effect, etc. shown in FIG. 74) for notifying the operation of the frame movable body, and the control means is related to the notification effect. The first pattern for operating the frame movable body (movement + notification first pattern, etc.) and the second pattern for operating the frame movable body without being related to the notification effect (motion-only second pattern, etc.) By controlling the operation of the frame movable body, it is controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) that is advantageous to the player depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern. Expectations are different (as shown in FIG. 75, during a normal game, when the first pattern is executed, it is better. (The expectation of a big hit is higher than when the second pattern is executed, etc.).
According to this configuration, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, since the degree of expectation that the frame movable body is controlled in an advantageous state differs depending on whether the frame movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, the interest of the production using the frame movable body provided in the game frame is improved. Can be made to.

It should be noted that the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state favorable to the player may be different between when the first movement of the movable body is executed and when the second movement of the movable body is executed. Further, depending on the combination of the movement of the movable body (first movement, second movement) and the movement of the frame movable body (first pattern, second pattern), the degree of expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player is different. You may. For example, when the movement of the movable body is the first movement, the movement of the frame movable body is higher in the first pattern than in the second pattern, but when the movement of the movable body is the second movement, the frame is movable. If the movement of the body is higher in the second pattern than in the first pattern, the movement of the movable body is the first movement even if the movement of the frame movable body is the same in the first pattern. The degree of expectation of a big hit changes depending on whether it is the second action or the second action, and the interest of the production can be improved.

Further, as an example of a form of a gaming machine capable of improving the effect of the effect and improving the interest of the effect using the frame movable body, an advantageous state advantageous for the player (big hit game state, etc.). A game machine (pachinko game machine 901, etc.) that can be controlled by the player, and a frame movable body (first upper accessory 9029L, second upper accessory 9029R, etc.) that is operably provided in the game frame, and the frame movable. A control means for controlling the movement of the body (microcomputer 90100 for effect control, etc.) and a notification effect (effect display device 909) for executing a notification effect (notification effect, etc. shown in FIG. 74) for notifying the operation of the frame movable body. Etc.), and the control means has a first pattern (operation + first pattern of notification, etc.) for operating the frame movable body in relation to the notification effect, and the frame not related to the notification effect. The movement of the frame movable body is controlled by a second pattern for operating the movable body (a second pattern of only movement, etc.), and whether the frame movable body is operated by the first pattern or the second pattern. (As shown in FIG. 75, during a normal game, the jackpot expectation is higher when the first pattern is executed than when the second pattern is executed, depending on the expectation that is controlled to the advantageous state. Is expensive, etc.) Game machines can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the form example of this game machine will be described as another form example.

(Example of other forms)
Hereinafter, other form examples will be described with reference to the drawings. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown as an example of a gaming machine, the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and may be other gaming machines such as coin gaming machines and slot machines, and games capable of playing games. Any gaming machine may be used as long as it is a machine. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 61 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is a gaming machine in which a gaming ball as a gaming medium is driven into the gaming area 907 to play a game. The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906). In the pachinko game machine 901, a game is played by driving a game ball as a game medium into a game area.

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. At the lower part of the hitting ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiving plate 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 903, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hitting ball, and the like are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 904 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and the player A stick controller 90122 is attached which can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right). In the stick controller 90122, a player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and presses and pulls the stick controller 90122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 90125 (see FIG. 64) capable of instructing operation is provided, and inside the operation rod of the stick controller 90122, a trigger sensor 90121 (FIG. 64) that detects a predetermined instructing operation by pushing / pulling the trigger button 90125 or the like. See) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 64) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIG. 64) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

On the member forming the ball striking plate (upper plate) 903, for example, the player presses a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 90122) to perform a predetermined instruction operation. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor 90124 (see FIG. 64) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 61, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be set to be closer to the left or right on the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship. As the operating means, other operating means such as a lever switch and a jog dial may be provided.

Near the center of the game area 907, an effect display device 909 is provided as a display means capable of variablely displaying (also referred to as variable display) an effect symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each. On the right side of the effect display device 909 in the game area 907, there is a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a that variablely displays the first special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information that can identify each of them. A second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variablely displays the second special symbol as a plurality of types of identification information capable of identifying each of them is provided.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is composed of a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers and characters. The effect display device 909 is composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD), and on the display screen, an effect symbol display area for performing a variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is provided. Be done. In the effect symbol display area, for example, a symbol display area for variable display of three decorative (effect) effect symbols, left, middle, and right, is formed.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

Each of the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b is controlled by a game control microcomputer mounted on a main board (game control board). The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 908a is executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 908b is used to display the effect. (2) When the variable display of the special symbol is being executed, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game.

More specifically, in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 9013). Or, after passing through the second start winning opening 9014 (including winning), the start condition of the variation display (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). It is started based on the establishment of the state where the display is not executed and the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. To do. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate as a winning area, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winned) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

When the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a, or when the jackpot display result (big hit symbol) as a specific display result is displayed on the second special symbol display 908b. When the derivation display is performed, the effect display device 909 also derivates and displays the jackpot display result (combination of jackpot symbols) as the specific display result. When the specific display result is displayed as the display result of the variable display in this way, it is controlled to the specific game state (big hit game state) as an advantageous state in which an advantageous value (advantageous value) is given to the player.

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). Stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed in a state that matches (combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. Then, the effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as a reach state) is called a reach effect.

Here, in the reach state, when the effect symbols stopped and displayed in the display area of the effect display device 909 form a part of the jackpot combination, the variable display of the effect symbols that are not yet stopped and displayed continues. The display state, or the display state in which all or part of the effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in synchronization while forming all or part of the jackpot combination. In other words, the reach means a state in which the identification information constitutes a specific display result in a plurality of variable display areas, but at least a part of the variable display areas is in variable display. In this embodiment, the reach state is formed in a state in which the same symbol is stopped in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol is not stopped in the middle symbol display area, for example. The symbols stopped in the left and right symbol display areas when the reach state is formed are called reach formation symbols or reach symbols.

The display effect in the reach state is the reach effect display (reach effect). In addition, during reach, unusual effects may be performed with lamps and sounds. This production is called reach production. Further, at the time of reach, a character (an effect display imitating a person or the like, which is different from a design (effect symbol or the like)) can be displayed, or a display mode (for example, color) of a background image of the effect display device 909 can be displayed. ) May be changed. The change in the display of the character and the display mode of the background is called the reach effect display. In addition, some reach is set so that when it appears, a big hit is more likely to occur than in a normal reach. Such a special reach is called super reach.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning opening 9014 than the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 9013 than the second starting winning opening 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize). Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b consisting of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 905 and launches the game ball into the game area 907 using the rotational force of the drive motor (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the first (1), the first special symbol display 908a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if it is in a state where the variation display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variation display of the special symbol ends and the second (2), the second special symbol display 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless it is possible to start the variable display of the second special symbol, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

The effect display device 909 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variation display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and the variation display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. The variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, at the lower position on the display screen of the effect display device 909, a hold storage display unit (total hold storage display unit) that displays the total number of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number (total hold storage number) is displayed. , Hold display area, not shown). In the total hold storage display unit, as the hold storage display, the number of hold storage images can be specified by, for example, the number of displayed images of a predetermined image (by displaying one hold storage image corresponding to each of the hold storage information). Specify the number of pending memories.) Is displayed. By providing the total hold storage display unit that displays the total number in this way, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the start condition of the variable display. In each of the first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and the effect display device 909, the light emitting display and the image display for indicating the number of hold storages are hold display or hold. It is called a memory display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 9020 repeatedly continuously controls the open state and the closed state. In the repetitive continuous control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 9020 is open is called a round. Thereby, the repetitive continuous control is also called a round control. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of big hits are provided, and when it is decided to make a big hit, one of the big hit types is selected.

On the left side of the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 that variablely displays the normal symbols that can identify each of them is provided. In this embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variablely displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9 in a variable manner. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes from to an open state that is advantageous for the player. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, every time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by 1.

Further, an accessory 9012 is provided above the effect display device 909. The accessory 9012 is located between the game board 906 and the effect display device 909, and the position can be displaced by the accessory motor 9017. The accessory 9012 is usually located in a place that is difficult for the player to see, and moves to a position that is visible to the player when a predetermined effect is executed (for example, a position in front of the effect display device 909).

At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

Further, on the upper part of the game frame, a first upper accessory 9029L, a second upper part as a movable body that can be projected from the game frame by rotating with respect to a shaft 90290 (see FIG. 62) provided in the game frame. The accessory 9029R is provided. The first upper accessory 9029L on the left side when viewed from the player can be rotated by the first upper accessory motor 9030L (see FIG. 64), and the second upper accessory 9029R on the right side when viewed from the player. Can be rotated by the second upper accessory motor 9030R (see FIG. 64). In the following, the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R may be collectively referred to as an upper accessory.

The rotation angle of the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R can be adjusted stepwise. Further, a first upper LED 9029A is provided inside the first upper accessory 9029L, and emits light with the same brightness regardless of the rotation angle of the first upper accessory 9029L. Further, a second upper LED 9029B is provided inside the second upper accessory 9029R, and emits light with the same brightness regardless of the rotation angle of the second upper accessory 9029R. As described above, since the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B as the light emitting means emit light with the same brightness regardless of the rotation angle of the upper accessory, it is possible to prevent the control of the light emitting means from becoming complicated.

In addition, a prepaid card unit (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a “card unit”) that enables ball lending by inserting a prepaid card is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 901 (not shown).

FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the operation of the upper accessory. FIG. 62 shows the state of the pachinko gaming machine 901 on the right side surface when viewed from the player. The rotation angles of the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R can be adjusted stepwise with respect to the shaft 90290 provided in the game frame. For example, as shown in FIGS. 62A to 62D, the rotation angle of the upper accessory can be adjusted in four stages of 0 degree, 45 degree, 60 degree, and 90 degree. The operation of the upper accessory is controlled by the effect control microcomputer 90100. For example, when the rotation angle is set to 45 degrees, the upper accessory operates from 0 degrees to 45 degrees when the upper accessory effect described later is executed, and when the upper accessory effect is completed, the upper accessory effect is completed. The object returns to the first 0 degree position. Further, the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B are controlled by the effect control microcomputer 90100 so as to emit light with the same brightness regardless of the rotation angle of the upper accessory.

FIG. 62A shows a state when the upper accessory is set to 0 degree, which is a rotation angle at which the upper accessory does not protrude at all with respect to the game frame. In FIG. 62A, since the rotation angle of the upper accessory is set to 0 degrees, the upper accessory does not operate, and the light from the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B reaches the player. There is no such thing. It should be noted that the effect that the light from the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B leaks from the gap of the game frame may be executed. Further, when the rotation angle of the upper accessory is 0 degrees, the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B may be controlled so as not to emit light.

FIG. 62B shows a state when the upper accessory is set to 45 degrees with respect to the game frame. At this time, the light from the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B reaches the player, but since the light emitting surface is small even if the brightness is the same, the light reaching the player is compared with the case of 60 degrees or 90 degrees. There are few. FIG. 62 (c) shows a state when the upper accessory is set to 60 degrees with respect to the game frame. At this time, the amount of light reaching the player from the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B is larger than that at 45 degrees.

FIG. 62 (d) shows a state when the upper accessory is set to 90 degrees, which is the most protruding rotation angle with respect to the game frame. At this time, since the light emitting surface becomes the largest, the largest amount of light reaches from the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B.

As shown in FIG. 62, since the rotation angle of the upper accessory can be adjusted stepwise, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated by adjusting the rotation angle of the upper accessory steplessly.

Here, in FIGS. 62 (b) to 62 (d), the operating speed of the upper accessory is controlled to be different depending on the rotation angle of the upper accessory. Specifically, in the rotation operation of the upper accessory, the rotation speed increases in the order of 45 degrees <60 degrees <90 degrees. In this way, by making the rotation speed different depending on the rotation angle of the upper accessory, it is possible to standardize the effect time of the effect executed when the upper accessory is operated.

FIG. 63 is a hit type table. In the hit type table of FIG. 63, for each type of hit in the jackpot, the jackpot probability after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, the fluctuation time after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of times of opening in the jackpot The number of rounds) and the opening time of each round are shown.

Specifically, in the big hit game state, after the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened, the end condition of the predetermined open state (a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or The closed state is set when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls is satisfied (opening end condition). Then, when the opening end condition is satisfied, the continuation right is generated, and the special variable winning ball device 9020 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times of opening in the jackpot game state reaches the predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (final round).

Of the "big hits", after being controlled to the big hit game state, the probability change state is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than the normal state (normal game state that is not the probability change state) as the special game state. The type of jackpot that shifts to (an abbreviation for a probability fluctuation state and also called a high probability state) is called a "probability variation jackpot". Further, in this embodiment, as the special gaming state, when the fluctuation time (variation display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is controlled to the time reduction state which is shorter than the non-time reduction state in association with the probability variation state. There is. It should be noted that the special gaming state may be controlled to a time saving state independently of the probability change state.

In this way, by shifting to the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that when the time saving state is reached, an effective start winning prize is likely to occur and a big hit game may be performed. Increase. Of the "big hits", the type of big hit that does not shift to the probabilistic state after being controlled to the big hit game state of 15 rounds is called "normal big hit".

Further, as a special gaming state, the frequency with which the game ball enters the variable winning ball device 9015 is increased by increasing the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened in association with the probability change state or the time saving state. The variable winning ball device 9015 may be controlled to an electric chew support control state that facilitates winning (higher approach, higher frequency). Since the electric chew support control state is a high base state as described later, it is mainly referred to as a high base state in the following description.

Here, the electric chew support control will be described. The electric chew support control is a control that shortens the fluctuation time of a normal symbol (the time from the start of fluctuation display to the time of deriving and displaying the display result) to derive and display the display result at an early stage (normal symbol shortening control), and the normal symbol. Control to increase the probability that the stop symbol will be a hit symbol (normal symbol probability variation control), control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 9015 (opening time extension control), and increase the number of times the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened. Control (control to increase the number of times of opening) is performed. When such control is performed, the time ratio during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state is higher than when the control is not performed, so that the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is high. Is increased, and it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize at the start (it becomes easier to satisfy the execution conditions of the variable display in the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b and the effect display device 909). As a result of this control, the frequency of winning the second start winning opening 9014 increases, so that the gaming state in which the frequency of establishment of the second start condition and / or the frequency of execution of the variation display of the second special symbol increases.

The state in which the winning frequency to the second starting winning opening 9014 is increased by the electric chew support control (high frequency state) is the ratio of the number of game balls paid out as prize balls according to the winning to the number of shot balls. Since the "base" is in a higher state than when the control is not performed, it is called a "high base state". When such control is not performed, it is called a "low base state". Further, such a control is a variable winning ball device 9015, that is, a control that facilitates winning a prize in the variable winning ball device 9015 by supporting the winning by the electric tulip, and is called "electric chew support control".

In this embodiment, "high probability state (probability change state)" and "low probability state (non-probability change state)" are used as terms indicating a state of jackpot probability, and as a term indicating a combination of base states. , "High base state (electric chew support control state)" and "low base state (non-electric chew support control state)" are used.

Further, in this embodiment, as terms indicating a combination of the jackpot probability state and the base state, "low probability low base state", "low probability high base state", and "high probability high base state" are used. Use. The "low probability low base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a low base state. The "low probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a low probability state and the base state is a high base state. The "high probability high base state" is a state indicating that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state and the base state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 63, as the 15-round jackpot, a plurality of types of jackpots, a normal jackpot and a probabilistic jackpot, are provided. The normal jackpot is a jackpot controlled into a non-probability change state, a time saving state, and a high base state (low probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the normal jackpot, the condition that the non-probability state continues for a period until the next jackpot occurs, the time saving state and the high base state are executed a predetermined number of times that the fluctuation display is executed 100 times, and the next jackpot It continues for a period until the earlier condition, which is the condition until the occurrence of the above, is satisfied. In addition, the normal jackpot may be controlled so as to be a jackpot controlled in a non-probability change state, a non-time saving state, and a non-electric chew support control state (low probability low base state).

The probability variation jackpot is a jackpot in which control is performed to shift to a probability variation state, a time saving state, and a high base state (high probability high base state) after the end of the 15 rounds jackpot game state. In the probability variation jackpot, the condition that the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times of 100 times or the condition that the next jackpot occurs, whichever is earlier, is satisfied. Continue until you do.

FIG. 64 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration in the main board (game control board) and the effect control board. Note that FIG. 64 also shows the payout control board 9037 and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit. Includes 9057. The game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer having a ROM 9054 and a RAM 9055 built-in. The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or the whole thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on a power supply board (not shown). That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot supply power). In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or processes) the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056). Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variation display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and occurs at random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the start winning time when the numerical data is read (extracted). Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data to be updated by the random number circuit 90503.

Further, an input driver circuit 9058 that gives a detection signal from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. In addition, the output circuit 9059 that drives the solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015 and the solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 forming the big winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560 is also main. It is mounted on the substrate 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a for variable display of special symbols, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010 for variable display of normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 is performed.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control microcomputer 90100, ROM 90102, RAM 90103, VDP 90109, an I / O port unit 90 105, and the like. The ROM 90102 stores programs and data for effect control such as display control. The RAM 90103 is used as a work memory. The ROM 90102 and the RAM 90103 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 90100. The VDP 90109 cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 90100 to control the display of the effect display device 909.

The effect control microcomputer 90100 is an effect control command for instructing the effect content from the game control microcomputer 90560 via a relay board 9077 that allows signals to pass in only one direction from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In addition to controlling the fluctuation display of the effect display device 909, the display of the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side is controlled via the lamp driver board 9035, and from the speaker 9027 via the audio output board 9070. Performs various production controls such as controlling the sound output of. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 executes the control according to the program stored in the ROM 90102 in the effect control microcomputer 90100, the effect control microcomputer 90100 (or the effect control CPU 90101) executes the control (or the effect control CPU 90101). (Processing) specifically means that the effect control CPU 90101 executes the control according to the program. This also applies to the microcomputer mounted on the board other than the effect control board 9080.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sends an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action to the trigger button 90125 of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the trigger sensor 90121 to the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. Enter via. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90124 via the input port of the I / O port unit 90105. To do. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 90122 is detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 to the I / O port unit 90105. Enter through the port. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 vibrates the stick controller 90122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port of the I / O port unit 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the accessory motor 9017 via a motor drive circuit (not shown) to operate the accessory 9012.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the first upper accessory motor 9030L to operate the first upper accessory 9029L via a motor drive circuit (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 drives the second upper accessory motor 9030R to operate the second upper accessory 9029R via a motor drive circuit (not shown). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the display of the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B provided on the upper part of the game frame via the lamp driver board 9035.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In FIG. 65, the type of random number, the update range, the use, and the addition condition are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R': A random counter for hit determination that determines whether or not to make a big hit. Random R'is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, added and updated from 0, added and updated up to its upper limit of 65535, and then added and updated again from 0. (2) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of jackpot (type, normal jackpot, or one of probabilistic jackpot) and jackpot symbol (for jackpot type determination, jackpot symbol determination). (3) Random 2'(MR2'): Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type). (4) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern). (5) Random 4'(MR4'): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination). (6) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining the initial value of random 4').

In this embodiment, as the jackpot in the specific gaming state, a plurality of types of a normal jackpot and a probability variation jackpot are included. Therefore, when a big hit is determined based on the value of the big hit judgment random number (random R'), the big hit type is one of these based on the value of the big hit type judgment random number (random 1'). It is decided by the jackpot type of. Further, when the jackpot type is determined, the jackpot symbol is also determined based on the value of the jackpot type determination random number (random 1'). Therefore, the random number 1'is also a random number for determining the jackpot symbol.

Further, the variation pattern is first determined by using the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2'), and is included in the determined variation pattern type using the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3'). Determine one of the fluctuation patterns. As such, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-step lottery process. The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. One or more fluctuation patterns belong to the fluctuation pattern type. The fluctuation pattern type is sometimes called a fluctuation type.

In this embodiment, the variation pattern is classified into a normal variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type without reach, and a reach variation pattern type, which is a variation pattern type with reach.

Such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio of the fluctuation pattern type is different between the time saving state and the non-time saving state when the display result is out of order. When is, the fluctuation time is shortened as compared with the case where the time is not shortened. For example, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of a predetermined fluctuation pattern is set shorter than that in the non-time-shortening state in order to shorten the average time of the fluctuation time as compared with the non-time-saving state, or the fluctuation pattern type is the most variable. The rate at which the variation pattern type with the shortest time is selected is high, and even when the reach type is selected, the rate at which the normal reach variation pattern with the shortest variation time is selected among the variation pattern types is set to be high. By doing so, the average time of the fluctuation time becomes shorter than when the time is not shortened.

It should be noted that such a fluctuation pattern type is set so that the selection ratio differs depending on whether the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed fluctuation is equal to or more than a predetermined number and less than a predetermined number. When the number of reserved storages of each special symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the holding number reduction control is executed in which the variable display time is shortened as compared with the case where the number of reserved storages of each special symbol is less than a predetermined number. You may try to do it. For example, in the hold number reduction control state, the rate at which the fluctuation pattern type having a short fluctuation display time such as the normal fluctuation pattern type is selected is set to be higher than in the hold number reduction control state. , The average time of the variable display time may be shortened as compared with the case where the hold number reduction control state is not performed. Further, in the hold number shortening control, the fluctuation display time itself of the fluctuation pattern type may be shortened even when the same fluctuation pattern type is selected as compared with the case where the hold number shortening control state is not performed.

Further, the variation pattern may be a one-step determination method in which the variation pattern is determined by one random number lottery, instead of a two-step determination method in which the variation pattern type is determined and then the variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 66A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal time (non-probability change state) jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state, that is, a non-probability change state) and a probability change time jackpot determination table used in the probability change state.

Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 66 (A) is set as a jackpot judgment value in the normal jackpot determination table, and is described in the right column of FIG. 66 (A) in the probability variation jackpot determination table. Each numerical value is set as a jackpot judgment value. The jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at the time of probability change becomes the jackpot judgment value common to the jackpot judgment value set in the jackpot judgment table at normal time (referred to as the jackpot judgment value at normal time or the first jackpot judgment value) at the time of probability change. Due to the addition of the unique jackpot judgment value, a larger number (10 times the number) of jackpot judgment values (referred to as the probability variation jackpot judgment value or the second jackpot judgment value) is set. .. As a result, it is determined that the probability change state is a big hit with a higher probability than the normal state.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and compares the extracted value with the value of the jackpot determination random number (random R'). The jackpot determination random number value is shown in FIG. 66 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values shown in is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot) for the special symbol. The "probability" shown in FIG. 66 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit.

FIGS. 66 (B) and 66 (C) are explanatory views showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 9054. FIG. 66 (B) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the first hold memory) based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (the variation display of the first special symbol is displayed). This is the first special symbol jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) used for (when performed). FIG. 66 (C) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the hold memory (also referred to as the second hold memory) based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 9014 (the variation display of the second special symbol is displayed). This is the second special symbol jackpot type determination table used for (when performed).

Each of the first and second special symbol jackpot type determination tables of FIG. 66 (B) and FIG. 66 (C) is for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot symbol. Based on the random number (random 1') of, the type of jackpot is determined to be either "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", and is referred to for determining the jackpot symbol.

In the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 66 (B), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1'and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set. In the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 66 (C), the numerical value to be compared with the value of random 1', and the determination value corresponding to each of "normal jackpot" and "probability variation jackpot" (big hit type). Judgment value) is set.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 66 (B) and 66 (C), the jackpot type determination value is also used as a determination value (big hit symbol determination value) for determining the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "normal jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "3" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The determination value corresponding to the "probability variation jackpot" is also set as the determination value corresponding to "7" of the jackpot symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Using the jackpot type determination table, the CPU 9056 determines as the jackpot type the type corresponding to the jackpot type determination value in which the random 1'values match, and as the jackpot symbol, the jackpot symbol in which the random 1'values match. To determine. As a result, the jackpot type and the jackpot symbol corresponding to the jackpot type are determined at the same time.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 66 (B) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 66 (C) have the same ratio determined for the probability variation jackpot. In such a case, it is not necessary to divide the jackpot type determination table between the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when selecting the jackpot type from among a plurality of types of jackpots having different maximum number of rounds in the jackpot game state as the jackpot type, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 66 (C) is used in FIG. 66. It may be set so that the ratio of selecting the jackpot type having a large number of rounds is higher than that of the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of (B). In this way, in a high base state, the selection of the type of jackpot is advantageous for the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, the second special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 66 (C) may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the first special symbol jackpot type determination table of FIG. 66 (B). .. By doing so, the rate of the probability variation jackpot can be made higher in the variation display of the second special symbol than in the variation display of the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table may have a higher rate of determination of the probability variation jackpot than the second special symbol jackpot type determination table.

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, a variation pattern table used for selecting and determining variation patterns of special symbols and effect symbols in the game control microcomputer 90560 will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a variation pattern table used for determining a variation pattern in a tabular format.

In FIG. 67, a table for determining when the normal state is out of alignment is shown in (a), and a table for determining when the time saving state is out of alignment is shown in (b). Further, (c) shows a normal jackpot determination table, and (d) shows a probability variation jackpot determination table. Each of the determination tables of FIGS. 67 (a) to 67 (d) is stored in the ROM 9054, is selected according to the gaming state, and is used for determining (determining) the variation pattern type and the variation pattern.

The determination table shown in FIG. 67 is a variation pattern type determination table showing the relationship between the random 2'and the variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination table showing the relationship between the random 3'for each variation pattern type and the variation patterns belonging to each type. And include.

In the "variation pattern type" or "variation pattern" column in each table of FIG. 67, "normal" or "normal variation" indicates a normal variation pattern that does not reach.

Further, the "normal reach" in each table of FIG. 67 shows a fluctuation pattern of the normal reach that does not perform a particularly flashy effect when the reach state is reached. "Super reach" indicates a variation pattern in which a reach effect is performed to display a special effect image when the reach state is reached.

Further, as described above, "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the rate of selection is higher when a big hit occurs than in "normal reach", and the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the "super reach" is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time is longer than that of the "normal reach" (for example, the normal reach is 10 seconds and the super reach is 50 to 80 seconds). In addition, four types of fluctuation patterns are set for the super reach, and the degree of expectation of a big hit (a big hit) is such that the first super reach <the second super reach <the third super reach <the fourth super reach. (Possibility) is high.

The "expectation degree" is a concept including an expectation degree for a big hit, an expectation degree for a probability change, and the like. Specifically, the degree of expectation for a big hit (also referred to as reliability) is the degree of expectation (the ratio of a big hit) that becomes a big hit when each reach fluctuation pattern is selected. For example, the reach fluctuation is performed 100 times. If the jackpot is 60 times, the expectation for the jackpot is 60% (the appearance rate (probability) of the jackpot is 60%). The degree of expectation for probabilistic change means the degree of expectation (ratio of probable change) to shift to the probable change state.

The fluctuation pattern shown in the deviation time determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of “off”. The fluctuation pattern shown in the normal jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the fluctuation display is the display result of "normal jackpot". The fluctuation pattern shown in the probability variation jackpot determination table is a fluctuation pattern in which the final display result of the variation display is the display result of "probability variation jackpot".

Based on this information, for example, the fluctuation pattern of "fourth super reach (80 seconds)" shown in the column of "variation pattern" in FIG. 67 (a) has a fluctuation time of 80 as an off-display result. It is shown to be a "fourth superreach variation pattern" executed in seconds.

In the table of FIG. 67, the columns described as "random 2'range" and "variation pattern type" serve as a variation pattern type determination table section showing the relationship between the "random 2'range" and the "variation pattern type". This is a column showing the function. For example, in FIG. 67A as an example, all the values of random 2'(1-251) are set in each of a plurality of fluctuation pattern types such as "normal", "normal reach", and "super reach". It is divided into multiple numerical ranges and assigned. For example, taking FIG. 67A as an example, the value of random 2'extracted at a predetermined timing matches any of the determination values assigned to 140 to 229 among the random values of 1 to 251. Then, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern type is "normal reach".

Further, in the table of FIG. 67, the columns described as "random 3'range" and "variation pattern" function as a fluctuation pattern determination table unit showing the relationship between the "random 3'range" and the "variation pattern". It is a column indicating. The fluctuation patterns shown corresponding to each type of the fluctuation pattern type determination table are the fluctuation patterns belonging to each type. For example, taking FIG. 67 (a) as an example, the fluctuation patterns belonging to the type of "super reach" are "first super reach", "second super reach", "third super reach", and "first super reach". 4 Super Reach ".

All the values of random 3'(1-220) are divided into a plurality of numerical values and assigned to each of the plurality of fluctuation patterns corresponding to each fluctuation pattern type. For example, taking FIG. 67 (a) as an example, when it is decided to use the fluctuation pattern type of "super reach", the random 3'extracted at a predetermined timing is among the random values of 1 to 220. When it matches with any of the determination values assigned to 1 to 70, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern of the "first super reach (50 seconds)" is used.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out of alignment, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is out of alignment in the non-time saving state, the out-of-time determination table in FIG. 67A is selected. On the other hand, in the time saving state, when the variation display result is out of order, the time saving state out of time determination table shown in FIG. 67B is selected. By using the determination tables shown in FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), the reach ratio is kept constant when the normal state is out and the time saving state is out, regardless of the number of holdings.

When the variation display result for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit regardless of whether the time is shortened or not, the determination table is selected as follows in order to determine the variation pattern. When the variation display result is a normal jackpot, the normal jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 67 (c) is selected. When the variable display result is a probabilistic jackpot regardless of whether or not the time is shortened, the probabilistic jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 67 (d) is selected.

In the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 67 (b), the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation is set shorter than that of the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 67 (a). Then, in the time saving state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 67 (b), the fluctuation time is shorter than the reach variation (including the normal reach variation and the super reach variation) as compared with the normal state out-of-time determination table of FIG. 67 (a). The ratio determined for normal fluctuation (non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation (variation that results in out-of-reach display result without reaching)) is high, and the ratio determined for reach fluctuation with a longer fluctuation time than normal fluctuation is low. The data is set.

As a result, the rate of selection of fluctuation patterns with shorter fluctuation times is higher in the non-time saving state than in the non-time saving state (normal state), so that in the non-time saving state, the non-time saving state is selected. The fluctuation display is performed with a fluctuation time that is shorter on average than in the case of. By selecting the determination table in this way, the time saving state can be realized. Further, by setting the normal fluctuation so that the fluctuation time is shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to shorten the pending digestion in the time-saving state.

In the determination tables of FIGS. 67 (a) and 67 (b), which are selected when the data is out of alignment, the data is set so that the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such that normal reach> super reach. Has been done. On the other hand, in the determination tables of FIGS. 67 (c) and 67 (d) selected when a big hit occurs, the selection ratio of the reach type is selected in a high-low relationship such that normal reach <super reach. The data is set. As a result, when a big hit occurs, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the case of the loss, so that the reach of the super reach is increased. By producing the effect, the player's expectation can be increased.

Further, in the determination table of FIG. 67 (d) selected when the probability variation jackpot is obtained among the jackpots, the normal reach is achieved as compared with the determination table of FIG. 67 (c) selected when the jackpot is a normal jackpot. On the other hand, the data is set so that the ratio of selecting the type of super reach effect is high. As a result, when it becomes a probabilistic jackpot, the ratio of the reach effect of the super reach (the proportion occupied by the reach effect of the super reach when the reach is selected) is higher than that of the normal jackpot. By performing the reach production of the reach, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player for the probable change jackpot.

In addition, such a fluctuation pattern is when the total reserved storage number (total value) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol to be variable-displayed is a predetermined number or more (for example, the total reserved storage number is 3 or more). By setting the selection ratio to be different depending on whether the number is less than the predetermined number, when the total number of reserved storages is equal to or greater than the predetermined number, the fluctuation time is compared with the case where the total number of reserved storages is less than the predetermined number. May be executed to reduce the number of holds. However, even under the condition that the hold number shortening control is executed (for example, the total number of hold storages is 3 or more), the expectation for reach is maintained by keeping the ratio of reach (including normal reach and super reach) constant. Further, it is also possible to execute the hold number time reduction control so that the fluctuation time is not shortened only in the super reach among the reach. Further, the hold number time reduction control may be feasible by making the normal fluctuation with a short fluctuation time selected at a high rate, or may be feasible by shortening the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern itself. The combination may be used.

FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the game control microcomputer 90560, as shown in FIG. 68, various effect control commands are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the game control state.

The main commands in FIG. 68 will be described. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variation display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 67, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are display result designation commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type.

The command 8D01 (H) is a first symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is a second symbol variation designation command indicating that the variation display of the second special symbol is started. The command 8F00 (H) is a command (symbol confirmation designation command) for designating the end of the variation of the first and second special symbols.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is started (at the time of initial setting by clearing the RAM). The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is restarted (at the time of initial setting at the time of restart due to a power failure or the like other than RAM clear). When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 90560 sends a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and initializes the game machine otherwise. Send a command. The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 to A002 (H) are jackpot start designation commands for designating the start of the jackpot game state for each jackpot type (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A1XX (H) is a designated command indicating that the large winning opening is open for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a designated command after opening the large winning opening, which indicates after opening (closing) the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The commands A301 to A302 (H) are jackpot end designation commands for designating the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot (normal jackpot or probability variation jackpot).

The command A401 (H) is a first start prize designation command for designating that there was a first start prize. The command A402 (H) is a second start prize designation command that specifies that there was a second start prize.

The command B000 (H) is a normal state specification command that specifies that the game state is a normal state (low probability state). The command B001 (H) is a time saving state designation command for designating that the gaming state is the time saving state (high base state). The command B002 (H) is a probability change state designation command that specifies that the game state is a probability change state (high probability state).

The command C0XX (H) is a total hold storage number designation command indicating the total hold storage number. The command C100 (H) is a total hold storage number subtraction designation command indicating that the total hold storage number is subtracted by 1. In this embodiment, the total hold storage number designation command is executed when the game ball starts winning the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014 (for example, when executing the start opening switch passing process described later). , Is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Further, the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is sent to the effect control microcomputer 90100 at the start of the variation display (for example, when the special symbol variation display processing process described later is executed). The total hold storage specification command and the hold storage number subtraction specification command may also be used. For example, the total hold storage number specification command may be used as a command that can specify the hold storage number after subtraction. It should be noted that the command that can specify the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is transmitted, not as the total reserved storage number, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, respectively. The total value of and may be specified as the total number of pending storages.

The command C2XX (H) and the command C3XX (H) are the results of winning judgments such as jackpot determination, jackpot type determination, and variation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning to the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014. This is an effect control command that indicates the content. Of these, the command C2XX (H) is a symbol designation command that indicates whether or not a jackpot will be achieved and the determination result of the type of jackpot among the winning determination results. Further, the command C3XX (H) is a variation type command indicating a determination result (determination result of the variation pattern type) of which determination value range the value of the random number for determination of the variation pattern type falls within the determination result at the time of winning. Is.

In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 90560 determines whether or not the jackpot is a big hit, the type of the jackpot, and the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning. .. Then, a value for designating a big hit and a value for designating the type of the big hit are set in the EXT data of the symbol designation command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. A value that specifies a range of determination values as a determination result of the variation pattern type is set in the EXT data of the variation type command, and control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 90100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 90100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit and the type of the big hit at the time of starting winning, based on the value set in the symbol designation command. The fluctuation pattern type can be recognized based on the fluctuation type command.

Next, a configuration example of an area (hold storage buffer) for storing data such as random numbers (hold storage data) corresponding to the hold storage on the game control microcomputer 90560 side will be described. The hold storage buffer is provided in the RAM 9055.

In the first hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first hold storage number is secured. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer, a random number for determining a jackpot (random R'), which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1'), which is a software random number, and a variation pattern type determination. Random numbers (random 2') and random numbers for determining fluctuation patterns (random 3') are stored.

Based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, the CPU 9056 extracts such random values from the random number circuit 90503 and a random counter for generating software random numbers, and obtains them. The process of saving (storing) in the storage area in the 1-hold storage buffer or the 2nd hold storage buffer is executed. Specifically, these random values are extracted and stored in the first hold storage buffer based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, these random values are extracted and stored in the second hold storage buffer based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014.

The storage of information regarding the start winning prize as described above in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer may be indicated as "hold storage". The random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2') and the random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3') are not extracted and stored in the storage area at the time of starting winning, but the variation pattern setting process described later. It may be extracted at (at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol).

As will be described later, the data stored in the hold storage buffer in this way is read at the start winning prize and used for the look-ahead notice effect, and is read at the start of the variable display and used for the variable display.

When there is a start prize to the first start prize opening 9013 or the second start prize opening 9014, it is called a symbol designation command, a variation type command, a first (second) start prize designation command, and a total pending memory number designation command. Such a command indicating the determination result of the start winning determination process is transmitted from the main board 9031 to the effect control board 9080. In the start winning prize reception command buffer provided in the RAM 90103 of the effect control microcomputer 90100, the received symbol designation command, variation type command, first (second) start winning prize designation command, and total hold storage number designation command are stored. A storage area for storing data that can identify the received command is secured so that various commands such as the above can be stored in association with each other.

In this embodiment, the effect control pattern of the effect symbol performed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponds to a plurality of types of variation patterns, and the effect symbol variation display operation and reach. It is composed of data showing the control contents of various production operations such as the production display operation in the production and the like, or various production operations that do not involve the variable display of the production symbol. Further, the advance notice effect control pattern is composed of data indicating the control content of the effect operation that is the advance notice effect executed in response to the advance notice pattern in which a plurality of patterns are prepared in advance. The various effect control patterns are composed of data and the like indicating the control contents corresponding to various effect operations executed according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 901.

Next, the operation of the pachinko gaming machine 901 will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine 901, when the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031 executes a predetermined main process, a timer interrupt is periodically executed at predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) and the timer interrupt process is executed. By doing so, various game controls can be executed.

In the main processing, for example, necessary initial setting processing, initialization processing at normal time, game state recovery processing other than normal time, random number circuit setting processing (initial setting of random number circuit 90503), random number update processing for display (variation pattern). Random number update processing for initial value (update processing for the initial value of the count value of the random number generation counter for normal symbol hit determination) and the like are executed.

FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process. When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S (hereinafter, simply referred to as “S”) 9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 69. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (S9020). Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and their states are determined (switch processing: S9021). ..

Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 9041 is executed (S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, control to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in S9032 and S9033. To execute.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number and a big hit type determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: S9023). .. The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: S9024, S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the special winning opening in a predetermined order, and the special symbol process is performed. The value of the flag is updated according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order, and sets the value of the normal symbol process flag to the gaming state. Update accordingly.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: S9028). Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (S9030).

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 relates to turning on / off the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). S9033). Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting the drive signal in S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (S9034), and the process ends. With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated at predetermined time intervals.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the special symbol process process (S9026). In the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process process, the start port switch passage process is executed (S90312). Then, depending on the internal state, any one of S90300 to S90307 is performed.

In the game control microcomputer 90560, as described above, the RAM 9055 stores the hold storage data (first hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the first start winning opening 9013. The first hold storage buffer to be stored and the second hold storage buffer for storing the hold storage data (second hold storage data) such as the jackpot determination random number obtained based on the start prize to the second start winning opening 9014. Is provided. In each of these hold storage buffers, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of storages of each hold storage (4 in this example) is secured.

In the start port switch passing process, if the first start port switch 9013a is turned on, the number of stored first reserved storage data is the number of stored data on condition that the first reserved storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). Numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a variation pattern determination) are obtained from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number by increasing the value of the first reserved storage number counter for counting. Random numbers) are extracted, and the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "first" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed. On the other hand, if the second start port switch 9014a is on, the second hold storage number is counted on the condition that the second hold storage number does not reach the upper limit value (for example, 4). The value of the hold storage counter is increased by 1, and numerical data (for example, a random number for jackpot determination, a random number for determining a variation pattern type, and a random number for determining a variation pattern) are extracted from a random number circuit 90503 or a counter for generating a software random number. Then, the process of storing (storing) them in the storage area in the second hold storage buffer is executed. Further, the value of the total hold storage counter is increased by 1, and the process of storing (storing) the data indicating "second" in the hold specific area corresponding to the value of the total hold storage counter after the total is executed.

The processes of S90300 to S90307 are as follows. The special symbol normal process (S90300) is a process of determining whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit, and determining the type of big hit when the display result is a big hit. The variation pattern setting process (S90301) determines the variation pattern (determines the variation pattern using the random number for determining the variation pattern type and the random number for determining the variation pattern), and measures the variation time according to the determined variation pattern. This is a process for controlling the start of timekeeping of the variable time timer for the purpose.

The display result designation command transmission process (S90302) is a process of controlling the transmission of the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. The special symbol changing process (S90303) is a process of advancing the process to the special symbol stop process when the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses. The special symbol stop process (S90304) displays the fluctuation on the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b when the passage of the fluctuation time corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern is timed by the fluctuation time timer. It is a process of stopping and deriving and displaying the stopped symbol.

The large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305) is a process of controlling the opening of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 9020 according to the type of big hit. The processing during opening of the large winning opening (S90306) confirms the control of transmitting the effect control command for the round display effect during the big hit game state to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control and the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening. This is a process for performing processing and the like. If the conditions for closing the large winning opening are satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the process proceeds to the large winning opening pre-opening process (S90305). When all the rounds are completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process (S90307). The jackpot end process (S90307) is a process for controlling the effect control microcomputer 90100 to perform display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

Next, the operation of the effect control microcomputer 90100 will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing an effect control main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) mounted on the effect control board 9080.

When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the effect control main process. In the effect control main process, first, initialization processing is performed for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the effect control activation interval (for example, 2 ms) (S90701). ). After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and sets data such as a flag capable of identifying what the received effect control command is. Processing (for example, processing for storing data that can identify the received command in various command storage areas provided in RAM 90103) and the like are performed (command analysis processing: S90704). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the effect control process process (S90705). In the effect control process process, in order to perform various effects such as variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 according to the contents of the effect control command analyzed in S90704, the current control of each process according to the control state is performed. Select the process corresponding to the state (effect control process flag) and execute the effect control.

Next, random numbers used by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (SR1'-1 for determining the left stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1'-2 for determining the middle stop symbol of the effect symbol, SR1 for determining the right stop symbol of the effect symbol. A random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating ('-3, etc.) is executed (S90706). Each of such random numbers SR1'-1 to SR1'-3 is generated by the count of a random counter whose count value is updated by software, and each of them is cyclically updated within a predetermined range. It is used as a random number by extracting each at a predetermined timing.

Next, a hold storage display control process for controlling the display state of the hold display in the hold display area (moving, erasing, etc. of the hold display) is executed (S90707). After that, the upper accessory setting process for setting the operation mode of the upper accessory attached to the upper part of the game frame is executed (S90708). Then, it returns to the processing of S90702. The upper accessory setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 72.

By executing such an effect control main process, the effect control microcomputer 90100 transmits from the game control microcomputer 90560, and in response to the received effect control command, the effect display device 909, various lamps, and the first By controlling the effect devices such as the 1 upper accessory 9029L, the second upper accessory 9029R, and the speaker 9027, various effect controls are performed according to the game state.

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the upper accessory setting process (S90708) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 71. The upper accessory setting process is a process executed by the effect control CPU 90101 after the processes of S90701 to S90707 shown in FIG. 71 after the power is turned on, and the first upper accessory 9029L attached to the upper part of the game frame, This is a process for setting the rotation angle (opening / closing angle) of the second upper accessory 9029R. The rotation angle of the upper accessory is provided in a plurality of stages (for example, 0 degree, 45 degree, 60 degree, 90 degree, etc.), and one angle arbitrarily selected from them can be set.

Here, in the initial state (when the power is turned on for the first time or when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM), the rotation angle of the upper accessory does not protrude more than 90 degrees, which is the most protruding rotation angle with respect to the game frame. It is controlled to be (for example, 45 degrees). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the upper accessory from coming into contact with another object even when the adjustment is not performed.

The setting screen for setting the angle of the upper accessory is displayed after the power is turned on when the RAM 9055 is cleared and the initial operation of each accessory is executed as the initial operation for confirming the operation. When executing the initial operation, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not each accessory is present in the initial position in the detection signal from the accessory sensor provided near each accessory as a detection means. To do. On the other hand, when the power is turned on without clearing the RAM 9055, the upper accessory is not set. Therefore, when the effect control CPU 90101 receives the initialization designation command shown in FIG. 68, it determines that it is the upper accessory setting period, and when it does not receive the initialization designation command (power failure recovery designation). When a command is received), it is determined that it is not the upper accessory setting period.

In S90750, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not it is the upper accessory setting period depending on whether or not the initialization designation command is received. When the effect control CPU 90101 receives the initialization designation command, that is, when it is determined that the upper accessory setting period (Y in S90750), the CPU 90101 shifts to S90751 and does not receive the initialization designation command. In that case, that is, when it is determined that the upper accessory setting period is not reached (N in S90750), the process ends.

In S90751, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the setting operation has been detected. When the effect control CPU 90101 detects a setting operation by a clerk or the like (Y in S90751), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the rotation angle of the upper accessory and the rotation speed of the upper accessory according to the set angle (S90752). , S90753. On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 does not detect the setting operation (N in S90751), the process ends.

Next, in S90753, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the set angle is 0 degrees. When the set angle is 0 degrees (Y in S90753), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the upper accessory effect effect restriction flag (S90754), and ends the process. On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90101 ends the process when the set angle is not 0 degrees (N in S90753).

As shown in S90752, since the rotation angle and rotation speed of the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R are set according to the set angles, they rotate with respect to the shaft 90290 provided in the game frame. While operating the upper accessory, it is possible to prevent the upper accessory from coming into contact with another object such as a game frame of another game machine adjacent to the game machine or a data lamp arranged on the upper part.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (S90705) in the effect control main process shown in FIG. 71. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect, and after executing the look-ahead effect process (S90700) for selecting the type of the look-ahead effect, the value of the effect control process flag. Any of S90800 to S90807 is performed according to the above.

In the effect control process process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also controlled by the second special symbol. The control related to the variation display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of is also executed in one effect control process process.

The pre-reading effect processing (S90700) is a process for determining pre-reading such as whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, and determining the effect mode when executing the pre-reading effect. The look-ahead effect is a change in the special symbol based on the hold information (holding memory information) before the turn of the display (symbol change) of the special symbol arrives. It is a production technique that determines the content of the display and gives a notice at a stage before that what the variable display of the special symbol will be in the future. For example, when the hold information is a big hit, a big hit may occur later based on the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold information before the variable display by the hold information is executed. A kind of effect such as giving a notice is performed as a look-ahead effect. Hereinafter, the variable display based on the hold information targeted for the look-ahead effect is referred to as “target variable display”.

The variation pattern command reception waiting process (S90800) is a process of confirming whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 90560. If the variation pattern command is received, the process shifts to the effect symbol variation start processing.

The effect symbol variation start process (S98001) is a process for controlling the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) to be started. The effect symbol changing process (S90802) is a process for controlling the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern. The effect symbol variation stop process (S90803) is a process of stopping the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) and controlling to derive and display the display result (final stop symbol) of the variation display.

The jackpot display process (S90804) is a process of performing display control such as control of displaying a fanfare effect for notifying the effect display device 909 of the occurrence of a jackpot after the end of the fluctuation time. The process during the round (S90805) is a process for controlling the display during the round. When the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the process proceeds to the round post-processing, and if the final round is completed, the process proceeds to the jackpot end process. The round post-processing (S90806) is a process for controlling the display between rounds. When the round start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the processing during the round. The jackpot end effect process (S90807) is a process of performing display control in the effect display device 909 to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended.

The effect control CPU 90101 is a process stored in the ROM 90102 from the start of the variable display to the stop of the variable display, and during a predetermined effect control period from the start of the big hit game state to the end of the big hit game state. The effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 is controlled according to the process data set in the table.

The process table is composed of process timer setting values and data in which a plurality of combinations of display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variation time (variation display time) of the variation display of the effect symbol (decorative symbol) are described. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value. Such a process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

[Upper character production]
Next, various effects executed in this embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, the upper accessory effect in which the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R operate may be executed. In the upper accessory effect, the effect is based on the first pattern of notifying that the upper accessory is operating and the upper accessory is operating on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the upper accessory is operating but the effect display device 909 is used. The display screen of the above is provided with an effect by a second pattern in which the operation of the upper accessory is not notified.

FIG. 74 is a diagram for showing an example of the production of the upper accessory. 74 (a) to 74 (c) show the display screen of the effect display device 909 when the upper accessory effect according to the first pattern is executed. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), it is shown that the effect with high expectation is executed by displaying the chance image 9095 during the variable display. After that, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), a notification image 9096 indicating that the upper accessory is movable is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909. For example, in FIG. 74 (b), an image in which the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R project upward from the game frame is played.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), it is shown on the screen of the effect display device 909 that the upper accessory is at an angle of 90 degrees so as to protrude most. FIG. 74 (c) also shows how the first upper LED 9029A provided on the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper LED 9029B provided on the second upper accessory 9029R emit light.

During the execution of the upper accessory effect as shown in FIG. 74, the upper accessory starts the rotation operation at a set angle. In this way, on the screen of the effect display device 909, the notification image 9096 indicating that the upper accessory is operating is displayed, so that the player is surely notified that the upper accessory is operating. Can be done. The actual start time of the operation of the upper accessory may be after the image indicating that the upper accessory is operating is played on the effect display device 909, or before the image is played. Good.

Here, when the upper accessory operates, an effect that the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B emit light, and an effect that the frame LED 9028 other than the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B emits light are also executed. However, when the notification image 9096 indicating that the upper accessory is operating is displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909, the effect by the frame LED 9028 is not displayed. By doing so, since the upper accessory effect is executed without including the effect by the frame LED 9028 or the like, the operation of the upper accessory by the upper accessory effect can be made more conspicuous.

In addition, in FIGS. 74 (b) and 74 (c), a predetermined image may flow in the liquid crystal in the image flowing through the broadcast image 9096 displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909. Any kind of image may be played as a predetermined image on the liquid crystal in such an image. Specifically, the original character may be displayed as a premium effect for notifying a big hit that is not related to the operation of the upper accessory, or an image emitted by the frame LED 9028 or the like may be displayed.

Next, a table for determining the production content of the upper character production will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an upper accessory effect effect determination table. In FIG. 75, the table used for determining the upper character effect is different between the normal game and the high base. In addition, the upper character effect determination table determines whether or not to execute the upper character effect, and when the upper character effect is executed, the first pattern (when both the operation and the notification are executed) is executed. ) And the second pattern (when only the operation is executed), which is the data table used for the lottery for determining which upper accessory effect is to be executed. Here, the motion indicates an effect in which the upper accessory operates at a set angle. Further, the notification is, as described with reference to FIG. 74, an effect of reproducing a moving image indicating that the upper accessory is operating in the effect display device 909.

FIGS. 75 (A) and 75 (B) are diagrams showing an upper accessory effect effect determination table during a normal game. The upper character production determination table during the normal game includes the upper character production determination table at the time of a big hit during the normal game shown in FIG. 75 (A) and the upper character effect effect determination table at the time of loss during the normal game shown in FIG. 75 (B). It is included. The upper accessory effect effect determination table during these normal games is stored in the ROM 90102 provided on the effect control board 9080.

The upper accessory production determination table at the time of a big hit during a normal game of FIG. 75 (A) has a magnitude relationship of "first pattern> second pattern> no execution" according to the value of SR2'extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set. The upper accessory effect effect determination table at the time of loss during the normal game of FIG. 75 (B) has a magnitude relationship of "first pattern <second pattern <no execution" depending on the value of SR2'extracted at a predetermined timing. The data is set.

Due to the data settings in FIGS. 75 (A) and 75 (B), when the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result during the normal game, the upper character effect is executed as compared with the case where the display result is the off display. The rate of being done is high. Further, when the jackpot display result is obtained, the upper accessory effect of the first pattern is executed at a higher rate than the upper accessory effect of the second pattern. Therefore, when the upper character effect is executed, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased as compared with the case where the upper character effect is not executed. Further, when the upper character effect of the first pattern is executed, the player's expectation for a big hit can be increased as compared with the case where the upper character effect of the second pattern is executed.

Due to the setting of the data in FIGS. 75 (A) and 75 (B), the jackpot expectation is different depending on whether the upper accessory is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern during the normal game. It is possible to improve the interest of the production using the movable body provided in. More specifically, during a normal game, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first pattern is executed than when the second pattern is executed, so that the expectation that the first pattern is executed is high. You can enhance the feeling.

FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D) are diagrams showing an upper accessory effect effect determination table in a high base. The upper accessory production determination table in the high base includes the upper accessory production determination table at the time of high base medium big hit in FIG. 75 (C) and the upper accessory production determination table at the time of off the high base in FIG. 75 (D). It is included. The upper accessory effect effect determination table in these high bases is stored in the ROM 90102 provided on the effect control board 9080.

In the high-base medium-big hit upper accessory production determination table of FIG. 75 (C), data is set so that the magnitude relationship of "second pattern> no execution" is obtained according to the value of SR2'extracted at a predetermined timing. Therefore, it is not decided to produce the upper part of the first pattern. In the upper accessory production determination table at the time of deviation from the high base of FIG. 75 (D), the data is determined so that it is determined as "no execution" at a rate of 100%, not based on the value of SR2'extracted at a predetermined timing. It is set. That is, in the high base, the big hit is confirmed by executing the upper character effect by the second pattern.

Due to the data settings in FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D), when the display result of the variable display becomes the jackpot display result in the high base, the upper character effect is executed as compared with the case where the display result is the off display. The rate of being done is high. Therefore, even during the high base, when the upper character effect is executed as in the normal game, the player's expectation for the big hit can be increased as compared with the case where the upper character effect is not executed. ..

Further, due to the setting of the data in FIGS. 75 (C) and 75 (D), the upper character effect of the first pattern in which both the operation and the notification are executed is not executed in the high base. That is, when the big hit game state is controlled in the high base, the upper accessory is operated by the second pattern. Therefore, in a high base state where it is easy to be controlled by a big hit such as during a probability change or during a short time, it is possible to suppress the execution of a useless effect by executing the upper accessory effect by the second pattern without notification.

In this way, the upper character effect in the normal game state is an effect of moving the movable body as one of the notices, and the upper character effect in the high base state is a movable body as a big hit notification effect rather than a notice. It can be said that it is a production that moves. That is, the upper accessory effect in the high base state is a highly expected effect indicating that the jackpot is confirmed as the jackpot notification effect. In this way, when comparing the upper character production in terms of notice and notification, it can be said that notification has a higher degree of expectation.

Here, the operation mode of the upper accessory corresponding to the set angle is the same between the upper accessory effect by the first pattern and the upper accessory effect by the second pattern. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of control when operating the upper accessory.

It should be noted that the upper accessory effect by the first pattern and the upper accessory effect by the second pattern may not be exactly the same in the operation mode of the upper accessory, but may be similar in operation. Here, similarity means that there are many things in common, such as the same part. For example, as similarities, the operating speed, operating timing, and mode of operation (moving method, etc.) may be slightly different. In addition, the operation mode of the upper accessory when the upper accessory effect is executed may be different between the normal game state and the high base state.

Next, the setting of the effect when the upper character effect is executed will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. In FIG. 76, among the processes related to the setting of various effects included in the effect setting process in the effect symbol variation start process (S98001), the process related to the upper accessory effect is shown. In the effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 determines various effects to be executed in the upper accessory effect by performing the following processes.

The effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the upper accessory effect effect restriction flag for limiting the upper accessory effect effect is set (S90901). The effect control CPU 90101 shifts to S90902 when the upper accessory effect effect restriction flag is not set (N in S90901). On the other hand, when the effect control CPU 90101 is set with the upper accessory effect effect restriction flag (Y in S90901), the effect control CPU 90101 determines another effect (S90907) and ends the process.

In S90902, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the fluctuation executed this time is super reach. The effect control CPU 90101 shifts to S903 when the fluctuation executed this time is super reach (Y in S90902). On the other hand, when the fluctuation executed this time is not super reach (N in S90902), the effect control CPU 90101 determines another effect (S90907) and ends the process.

In S90903, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the high base. The effect control CPU 90101 shifts to S90904 when the current gaming state is not in the high base (N in S90903). On the other hand, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to S90908 when the current gaming state is in the high base (Y in S90903).

In S90904, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the fluctuation executed this time is a big hit. When the fluctuation executed this time is a big hit (Y in S90904), the effect control CPU 90101 determines the content of the upper character effect effect by the upper character effect effect determination table at the time of the big hit during the normal game (S90905), and other After deciding the production of (S90907), the process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation executed this time is not a big hit (N in S90904), the effect control CPU 90101 determines the content of the upper accessory effect by the upper accessory effect determination table at the time of loss during the normal game (S90906). After determining other effects (S90907), the process ends.

In S90908, the effect control CPU 90101 determines whether or not the fluctuation executed this time is a big hit. When the fluctuation executed this time is a big hit (Y in S90908), the effect control CPU 90101 determines the content of the upper accessory effect by the high-base medium-big hit upper accessory effect determination table (S90909), and other After deciding the production of (S90907), the process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation executed this time is not a big hit (N in S90908), the effect control CPU 90101 determines the content of the upper accessory effect by the upper accessory effect determination table when the high base is out of the middle (S90910). After determining other effects (S90907), the process ends.

As shown in S90901, when the upper character effect effect restriction flag is set, the execution of the upper character effect effect is restricted. In this way, even though the upper accessory is controlled to a rotation angle that does not protrude from the game frame, an effect related to the movement of the upper accessory (upper accessory effect) is executed, and the game is played. It is possible to prevent giving a feeling of strangeness to a person.

[About a modified example of motion control]
Next, a modified example of the motion control in the upper accessory will be described. The first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R are examples of the origin detection target accessory (operation target accessory) for which it is necessary to perform origin detection. The origin positions of the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R can be detected by an origin detection sensor (not shown). The operation may be controlled by using the accessory 9012 as the origin detection target.

Here, the operation of repeatedly moving the operation target accessory to the origin position (initial position) until the number of operation error determinations (for example, 3 times) is reached is referred to as non-detection operation control. The operation of temporarily leaving the origin position (initial position) and returning to the origin position (initial position) from a position away from the origin position (initial position) is the minimum speed based on the minimum control speed set in the operation process data at the time of detection. The control performed by is called operation control at the time of detection. Note that the position away from the origin position is a position near the origin position, that is, a position where each origin sensor cannot detect the detected portion of each upper accessory, and a predetermined position closer to the origin position than each effect position ( It is set as the operating position at the time of detection). By operating the operation target accessory at the control speed set in the actual operation confirmation process data corresponding to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer, the control speed of the operation target accessory can be changed in chronological order. Operation control for actual operation confirmation (long initialization operation control) is the control that accelerates or decelerates the same as the control speed set when the upper accessory is actually operated in the production by the upper accessory. ).

The operation mode and the control content of the upper accessory will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. FIG. 77 is a schematic explanatory view showing operation modes of non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control performed by the effect control CPU 90101. In FIG. 78, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the control speed in the operation control during detection, and (C) is the control speed in the operation control during non-detection. It is explanatory drawing which shows.

In addition, in FIGS. 77 and 78, the non-detection operation control (short initialization operation control) and the detection operation control (short) in the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R, which are the origin detection target accessories. Only the initialization operation control) and the actual operation confirmation operation control (long initialization operation control) will be described, and the description of the accessory 9012 which is not the origin detection target accessory will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 77, the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R are provided so as to be able to reciprocate between the origin position (retracted position, initial position) and the effect position, respectively, and the origin position. The forward movement from the effect position to the effect position and the return operation from the effect position to the origin position are considered to be actual operations actually performed in the upper accessory effect or the like.

In the effect control CPU 90101, when the detected portion of the upper accessory is not detected by the origin detection sensor when the initialization process is executed, that is, the origin of the upper accessory is some reason (for example, when the upper accessory is transported or installed on the game island). If it has moved from the position, or if it was not possible to return to the origin during the previous operation (for example, when performing the production, the origin return of the upper accessory could not be confirmed due to step-out, failure, catching, etc. of the motor, etc. Operation control at the time of non-detection in FIG. 77 due to a position other than the origin position (for example, when an accessory error (operation abnormality) such as inability to operate occurs) or when the game machine moves from the origin position due to vibration of the game machine). When it is at a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position, such as the position indicated by the black circle corresponding to), the non-detection operation control for returning to the origin is executed. When this non-detection operation control is executed, since the upper accessory is located at a position away from the origin position, the operation is limited to the operation of moving the upper accessory toward the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the detection operation control when the detected portion of the first upper accessory 9029L or the second upper accessory 9029R is detected by the origin detection sensor when the initialization process is executed. ..

For example, in order to ensure that the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, it is determined between the time when the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor and the time when the movement of the upper accessory in the origin position direction is restricted. When the operable range (for example, play) of is set, the origin may be returned and the vehicle may stop at a position further backward from the position detected by the origin detection sensor. Therefore, even if the detected portion is detected by the origin detection sensor, the operation control at the time of detection is performed to return the upper accessory to the more accurate origin position.

In this detection operation control, in order to temporarily release the detection state of the detected portion by the origin detection sensor, it is necessary to move the upper accessory to a position away from the origin position and then return it to the origin position. Since it is not necessary to move the upper accessory to, the upper accessory is moved from the origin position to the detection operation position near the origin position, and then returned to the origin position. That is, the reciprocating operation is performed at a shorter distance than the actual operation.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control in the initialization process, and then executes the actual operation confirmation operation control. The operation control for confirming the actual operation is the same as the actual operation actually performed by the upper accessory in various effects and the like.

Next, the control speeds set when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control are compared. The speeds shown in FIGS. 78 (A), 78 (B), and 78 (C) are control speeds set by the effect control CPU 90101 to operate each upper accessory, and are upper accessories. It is different from the actual operating speed of. That is, for example, when operating a predetermined upper accessory, even if the same control speed is set for one moving section and another moving section between the origin position and the effect position, the one moving section and the other When the mode is different from that of the moving section of the above, the operating speed when the upper accessory is actually operated may be different from the control speed. Even if the same control speed is set for the upper accessory, if there are differences in the size, weight, operation mode, operating distance, drive mechanism, etc. of each upper accessory, the actual operation of each upper accessory The speeds are not always the same. When operating multiple upper accessories with stepping motors of the same performance, even if the same control speed is set for each upper accessory, the size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, etc. of each upper accessory, If there is a difference in the drive mechanism or the like, the actual operating speed of each upper accessory is not necessarily the same.

As shown in FIG. 78 (A), when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the actual operation confirmation operation control, the set actual operation confirmation process data corresponds to the timer count value of the actual operation confirmation process timer. The confirmation target accessory is operated based on the set control speed. Specifically, it controls to accelerate from the origin position and then decelerate to stop at the effect position, and to accelerate from the effect position and then decelerate to stop at the origin position. That is, in the actual operation confirmation operation control for confirming that each upper accessory can operate normally, the control speed of the upper accessory is changed from low speed to high speed to low speed between the origin position and the effect position. Change in order. That is, when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the movable body effect of each upper accessory, the minimum speed (low speed) which is the first speed and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed which is faster than the minimum speed. Since each upper accessory is controlled to operate at a speed within the range, the minimum speed (low speed), which is the first speed, and the second speed, which is faster than the minimum speed, are used even when the operation control for checking the actual operation is executed. It is controlled so that each upper accessory operates at a speed within the range of the maximum speed (high speed) as the speed.

That is, the minimum speed as the first speed and the maximum speed as the second speed are the actual operating speeds of the upper accessory, and the control speed is set so as to be the minimum speed or the maximum speed as the operating speed. Will be done. In the following, when the upper accessory is operated based on the minimum control speed, it operates at the minimum speed, and when the upper accessory is operated based on the maximum control speed, it operates at the maximum speed. It is explained as.

Here, the control speed is set so that the operation speed of the upper accessory during acceleration and deceleration becomes the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation. In addition, when returning to the origin position after moving to the effect position, the upper accessory is controlled to be the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation check for a longer time than when stopping at the effect position. The detected part is detected by the origin detection sensor after the deceleration is surely decelerated.

As shown in FIG. 78 (B), when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the detection operation control, the actual operation is always confirmed during the period of moving from the origin position to the effect position and the period of moving from the effect position to the origin position. The upper accessory is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control. That is, in the effect control CPU 90101, the maximum speed in the detection operation control as the first operation control is equal to or less than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control (the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control). The upper accessory is always controlled to operate based on the lowest control speed set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation so as to be the same speed as the speed).

Further, in the case of the operation control at the time of detection, since the operation distance of the upper accessory is shorter than the operation control for the actual operation confirmation, the control speed when accelerated in the operation control for the actual operation confirmation, that is, the origin Since the detected part cannot be reliably detected by the detection sensor, or the upper accessory may be damaged by the impact when the upper accessory returns to the origin position and the movement is restricted from a short distance. Control to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

Further, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the non-detection time operation control, the effect control CPU 90101 always moves from an arbitrary position between the origin position and the effect position to the origin position. It is controlled to operate at the lowest speed (first speed) in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 has a maximum speed (maximum operation speed) in the non-detection operation control as the first operation control, which is equal to or less than the minimum speed (actual operation) in the actual operation confirmation operation control as the second operation control. Control is always performed to operate the upper accessory based on the lowest minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control so as to be the same speed as the minimum speed in the confirmation operation control).

In this case, since it is unknown how far the upper accessory is from the origin position, when the upper accessory is located near the origin position, when the upper accessory is accelerated in the operation control for actual operation confirmation. When operated at a controlled speed, that is, at a high speed, when the upper accessory returns to the origin position, the origin detection sensor cannot reliably detect the detected portion, or the upper accessory returns to the origin position from a short distance. Since there is a risk that the upper accessory or the like may be damaged by the impact when the movement is restricted, the operation is controlled to operate at the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

In this way, when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the non-detection operation control or the detection operation control as the first operation control, it is always simple based on the minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control. Control is performed so that the upper accessory operates at one (constant) operating speed. And since these minimum speeds are the minimum speeds in the operation control for actual operation confirmation corresponding to each upper accessory and are not the operation speeds common to each upper accessory, the minimum speeds in each upper accessory may be different. ..

Specifically, the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R are different in size, weight, operating mode, operating distance, and drive mechanism including the drive motor, so the same control speed is set. Even in that case, the actual operating speed of the upper accessory is different. Further, even when different control speeds are set for each upper accessory, the actual operating speed of the upper accessory is different. In this way, the minimum speed is an operating speed based on the control speed set according to each upper accessory, and in order to control so as to operate at the optimum minimum speed for the upper accessory, a plurality of upper parts having different modes are used. It is possible to reliably detect the accessory at the origin position.

As described above, the effect control CPU 90101 as a control means for controlling the operation of the upper accessory by the first upper accessory motor 9030L and the second upper accessory motor 9030R as the driving means for operating the upper accessory. The effect control CPU 90101 includes, as a first operation control, a non-detection time operation control and a detection time operation control, and as a second operation control for confirming that the upper accessory can operate normally. It is possible to execute the operation control for confirming the actual operation and the third operation control for performing the effect of the upper accessory by the upper accessory, and when executing the operation control for confirming the actual operation, the minimum speed is the first speed. Controls the upper accessory to operate at a speed within the range of the speed (low speed) and the maximum speed (high speed) as the second speed faster than the minimum speed, and performs non-detection operation control and detection operation control. When it is executed, it is controlled so that the upper accessory operates at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation as the second operation control.

By doing so, in the first motion control, the upper accessory operates at a speed at which it can be stopped at any timing, so that it can be safely positioned at the origin position. Specifically, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the distance for moving the upper accessory to the origin position may be shorter than the actual operation confirmation operation control, so that the non-detection operation control or detection By setting the maximum speed in the time motion control to the minimum speed in the motion control for confirming the actual operation, the detected part can be reliably detected by the detecting means, and the movement is restricted while the upper accessory is moved at high speed. It is possible to avoid damage due to the impact.

When the operation control at the time of non-detection or the operation control at the time of detection is executed, when the upper accessory is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation, the operation control at the time of non-detection or detection The control speed set when executing the time operation control and the minimum control speed set in the operation control for confirming the actual operation may be the same control speed or different control speeds.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, it always reaches a preset single (constant) operation speed, that is, always the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control. The first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R may be controlled to operate.

By doing so, the speed at which the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R are positioned at the origin position can be made constant, and the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R can be made constant. Can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, the first upper accessory 9029L or the second upper accessory 9029L or the second upper accessory at the lowest speed (first speed) in the actual operation confirmation operation control. The object 9029R may be controlled to operate.

By doing so, the speed is excessively reduced while ensuring the safe operation of the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R (for example, the speed is slower than the minimum speed in the operation control for actual operation confirmation). By selecting the maximum speed (first speed) that allows safe operation without any trouble, the period of non-detection operation control and detection operation control can be shortened.

Further, the CPU 90101 for effect control includes an origin detection sensor as a detection means capable of detecting that the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R are located at the origin position, and the origin detection sensor is in the detection state. If not, the non-detection motion control is executed, if the origin detection sensor is in the detection state, the detection motion control is executed, and if the non-detection motion control is executed, the upper part is at the lowest speed in the detection motion control. It may be controlled so that the accessory operates.

By doing so, it is possible to grasp whether or not there is a defect in the origin detection sensor by the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control. Further, when the non-detection motion control is executed, it is unknown whether or not the upper accessory is near the origin position, whereas when the detection motion control is executed, the upper accessory is the origin position. Therefore, in the operation control at the time of detection, the operation may be performed at a speed faster than the operation control at the time of non-detection and at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the number of operation error determinations to "3" when the origin detection sensor is not in the detection state when a specific abnormality (for example, an operation abnormality that occurs when the effect is executed) has occurred. Until it reaches the limit, the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R may be controlled to move toward the origin position at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation.

By doing so, even in the abnormal operation that is executed when a specific abnormality (for example, an error such as an operation abnormality that occurred when the production is executed) occurs, the first upper accessory 9029L or the second upper accessory 9029L or the second The upper accessory 9029R can be operated safely. Specifically, for example, when an operation abnormality occurs during the execution of the effect, and when the initialization process is performed after that, the upper accessory has not returned to the origin position, so that the operation control at the time of non-detection is executed. Will be. Further, when an operation abnormality occurs, it is considered that the upper accessory does not operate even in the initialization process. Therefore, as an operation at the time of abnormality, the first upper accessory 9029L or the second upper accessory 9029L or the second at the lowest speed in the operation control for confirming the actual operation. The upper accessory 9029R is controlled to operate toward the origin position.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 may not perform the actual operation confirmation operation control when the origin return error of the target accessory is stored.

By doing so, it is possible to prevent the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R from stopping at a position other than the origin position during the actual operation confirmation operation control due to an abnormality. Specifically, for example, if an operation abnormality occurs during the execution of the effect, it is possible that the upper accessory does not operate even in the initialization process. In that case, it is driven even if the operation control for checking the actual operation is executed. It is preferable not to execute the operation control for confirming the actual operation because the means is simply loaded and isted.

Further, the upper accessory has a first upper accessory 9029L and a second upper accessory 9029R, and the effect control CPU 90101 determines that the upper accessory is an origin detection target accessory that needs to perform origin detection. If this is the case, if it is determined that the upper accessory is not the origin detection target accessory that requires origin detection, while the non-detection operation control or detection operation control and the actual operation confirmation operation control are executed, it is not possible. The operation control at the time of detection and the operation control at the time of detection may not be performed.

By doing so, it is possible to perform the operation confirmation for actual operation confirmation only for the necessary upper accessory, and it is possible to shorten the operation confirmation time by the operation control for actual operation confirmation.

Further, when the effect control CPU 90101 executes the non-detection time operation control or the detection time operation control as the first operation of each of the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R, it is for checking the actual operation of each. The upper accessory may be controlled to operate at the lowest speed in the operation control, and the operation speed of the actual operation confirmation operation control may be different between the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R. ..

By doing so, it is possible to shorten the period of the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control while ensuring the safe operation of each upper accessory by the operation speed corresponding to each upper accessory. For example, in the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R, even if the same control speed is set in the operation control for actual operation confirmation, the size, weight, operation mode, and operation distance of each upper accessory are set. If there is a difference in the drive mechanism or the like, the actual operating speed of each upper accessory when the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control are executed will be different.

Specifically, even when the same control speed (minimum control speed set in the actual operation confirmation operation control) is set in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, among a plurality of upper accessories The actual operating speed of the heavy upper accessory is slower than the actual operating speed of the lighter upper accessory. Further, when the upper accessory is raised, the actual operating speed is slower than when the upper accessory is lowered. Further, when a spring or the like for urging the movable part in the effect direction is provided as a drive mechanism, when the spring is moved in a direction opposite to the urging force while the spring is contracted, the urging force is applied while the spring is extended. The actual operating speed will be slower than when moving in a direction that opposes. In this way, in the non-detection operation control and the detection operation control, when the upper accessory is controlled to operate at a speed equal to or lower than the minimum speed in the actual operation confirmation operation control, each upper accessory is controlled. It is preferable to set an individual minimum control speed in each operation control for confirming actual operation in consideration of the size, weight, operation mode, operation distance, drive mechanism, and the like.

For example, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged in the front-rear direction so that the second movable portion overlaps the front side of the first movable portion when viewed from the player when moving toward the origin position. When any of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control is executed, the operation control of both the first movable part and the second movable part is performed together. It is preferable to control so that the operating speeds (minimum speeds) of the 1 movable portion and the 2nd movable portion are different. By doing so, the power is turned on in a state where the first movable part and the second movable part are moved to positions away from the origin position for some reason, and the first movable part is set in the initialization process. When the non-detection motion control of both the first movable portion and the second movable portion is executed together, if the operating speeds (minimum speeds) of both the first movable portion and the second movable portion are controlled to be the same, the first The situation where the first movable part is hidden by the two movable parts and moves to the origin position becomes difficult to see, but by controlling the minimum speeds of the first movable part and the second movable part to be different, the first movable part and the first movable part are controlled. Since the two movable parts are displaced when they move, it becomes easy to confirm the origin return operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

Further, even when the first movable portion and the second movable portion larger (or longer) than the first movable portion are provided, the operating speeds (minimum speeds) of the first movable portion and the second movable portion are different. It is preferable to control the speed. By doing so, for example, the minimum in any of the non-detection operation control, the detection operation control, and the actual operation confirmation operation control of the first movable part, which is smaller (or shorter) than the second movable part and is inconspicuous. By making the speed slower than the minimum speed in any of the non-detection operation control, detection operation control, and actual operation confirmation operation control of the second movable part, which is conspicuous because the speed is larger (or longer) than the first movable part. , It becomes easy to confirm the operation of each of the first movable part and the second movable part.

In this way, when the first movable portion and the second movable portion different from the first movable portion are provided, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are respectively undetected motion control, detection motion control, and actual. It is preferable to control the operation speed (minimum speed) in the operation check operation control so as to be different. When the operation speeds (minimum speeds) of the first movable part and the second movable part are controlled to be different in this way, the operation control at the time of non-detection and the operation control at the time of detection of the first movable part and the second movable part, respectively. And the minimum control speed set in the operation control for confirming the actual operation may be different or may be the same.

Next, the main effects obtained by the above-described embodiment will be described.
(1) As shown in FIG. 75, the degree of expectation controlled by the jackpot game state is different between the first pattern and the second pattern as the upper accessory effect. Specifically, during the normal game, the expectation of a big hit is higher when the first pattern is executed as the upper character effect than when the second pattern is executed. In this way, the degree of expectation to be controlled in the big hit game state differs depending on whether the upper accessory is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern, so that the effect using the movable body provided in the game frame is used. Can improve the interest of. In addition, it is possible to increase the expectation that the first pattern will be executed.

(2) The upper accessory has the same operation in the first pattern and the second pattern. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the burden of control when operating the movable body.

(3) As shown in FIG. 74, on the screen of the effect display device 909, a notification image 9096 indicating that the upper accessory is operating is displayed. In this way, it is possible to reliably notify the player that the movable body is operating.

(4) As shown in FIG. 75, when the big hit game state is controlled in the high base, the upper accessory is operated according to the second pattern. In this way, in the high base state where the jackpot game state is easily controlled, it is possible to suppress the unnecessary execution of the effect by controlling the movement of the movable body by the second pattern.

(5) As shown in FIG. 74, on the screen of the effect display device 909, the effect by the frame LED 9028 is not displayed when the notification image 9096 indicating that the upper accessory is operating is displayed. By doing so, since the upper accessory effect is executed without including the effect by the frame LED 9028, the movement of the movable body due to the upper accessory effect can be made more conspicuous.

(6) As shown in S90752 of FIG. 72, the rotation angle and rotation speed of the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R are set according to the set angles. In this way, it is possible to prevent the movable body from coming into contact with another object while operating the rotating movable body with respect to the shaft 90290 provided in the game frame.

(7) As shown in S99001 of FIG. 76, when the upper accessory effect effect restriction flag is set, the execution of the upper accessory effect effect is restricted. In this way, even though the movable body is controlled to a rotation angle (0 degree) that does not protrude with respect to the game frame, the effect related to the movement of the movable body is executed, which makes the player feel uncomfortable. It can be prevented from giving.

(8) As shown in FIG. 62, the rotation angle of the upper accessory can be adjusted stepwise. In this way, it is possible to prevent the control from becoming complicated due to the stepless adjustment.

(9) In the initial state, the angle is controlled so that it does not protrude more than 90 degrees. In this way, it is possible to prevent the movable body from coming into contact with another object even when the adjustment is not performed.

(10) The rotation speed is made different depending on the rotation angle of the upper accessory. In this way, it is possible to standardize the effect time of the effect executed when the movable body operates.

(11) The first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B as the light emitting means emit light with the same brightness regardless of the rotation angle of the upper accessory. In this way, it is possible to prevent the control of the light emitting means from becoming complicated.

Next, modified examples, feature points, and the like of the embodiments described above are listed below.
(1) In the above-described embodiment, a first pattern of operation + notification and a second pattern of only operation are provided as an upper accessory effect. When the upper accessory effect by the second pattern is executed, the notification image 9096 indicating that the upper accessory is operating is not displayed on the screen of the effect display device 909, but another effect (upper accessory) is executed. The effect of another image that does not show the operation of) may be executed. In addition, the upper accessory may be operated in relation to the timing of switching the game state (when controlled by a big hit) or switching the effect (when developing into super reach).

(2) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the first upper LED 9029A and the second upper LED 9029B as the light emitting means emit light with the same brightness regardless of the rotation angle (operating angle) of the upper accessory has been described. However, the rotation angle and the brightness may correspond to each other. For example, when the angle is 45 degrees, the brightness may be low, when the angle is 60 degrees, the brightness may be medium, and when the angle is 90 degrees, the brightness may be high. On the contrary, the narrower the rotation angle, the stronger the brightness may be. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the light from becoming difficult to see.

(3) In the above-described embodiment, the upper part of the game frame has been described as the attachment position of the accessory. However, the accessory may be arranged at a position other than the upper part of the game frame. For example, it may be arranged at a position such as a side surface, a front surface, or a lower part of the game frame.

(4) In the above-described embodiment, the case where the first pattern of motion + notification has a higher expectation of big hit than the second pattern of motion only has been described in the normal gaming state. However, the jackpot expectation may be higher in the second pattern than in the first pattern. Further, in the high base state, the upper accessory effect may be executed by the first pattern, or the jackpot expectation may be different between the first pattern and the second pattern.

(5) In the above-described embodiment, as the first pattern of the upper accessory effect, a notification for reproducing a moving image indicating that the upper accessory is operating has been described. The notification may be a moving image or an image of the actual upper character, or may be a picture or CG imitating the actual object.

(6) In the above-described embodiment, when the upper accessory effect is executed, the operation means such as the accessory 9012 or the push button 90120 other than the upper accessory may be operated or the effect of emitting light may be executed. Even in such a case, when displaying the notification image 9096 indicating that the upper accessory is operating, it is desirable not to display the indication that the effect by the accessory 9012 or the operating means is executed. ..

(7) In the above-described embodiment, when the upper character effect effect restriction flag is set, the execution of the upper character effect effect is restricted (it was in a prohibited state in which it is not executed). However, when the upper character production restriction flag is set, an alternative effect may be executed instead of the upper character effect.

(8) In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of movable bodies (accessories) are provided, such as the first upper accessory 9029L and the second upper accessory 9029R. Such a movable body may be capable of separately performing operation settings.

(9) In the above-described embodiment, in the initial state (when the power is turned on for the first time or when the power is turned on by clearing the RAM), the rotation angle of the upper accessory is the most protruding rotation angle with respect to the game frame. The case where the angle is controlled so as not to protrude more than 90 degrees (for example, 45 degrees) has been described. However, if the game store can be fully opened up to 90 degrees and no new setting is made, it is assumed that the user will continue to use the game without noticing that the angle is set to 45 degrees. Therefore, it is desirable to notify the current rotation angle on the screen of the effect display device 909 when the pachinko gaming machine 901 is started. In this way, the clerk at the amusement park can easily grasp the current rotation angle of the upper accessory.

(10) In the various controls shown in the above-described embodiment, medals are inserted, a predetermined number of bets are set, a plurality of types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operation lever by the player, and the player stops. If the combination of stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols in the display means are stopped in response to the operation of a button, the application is applied to a slot machine (slot machine) in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. Is also possible. In slot machines, bonuses such as big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), AT that executes an effect to notify the internal lottery result, RT that the winning probability of the re-game combination is different from that of the normal game state, The above-mentioned upper bonus effect may be executed as an effect indicating control of the ART shifted to AT and RT. For example, the upper character effect may be executed when the AT or the like is won (including the Gase effect in the case of a loss), and the effect only by the action may be executed during the AT.

(11) In the above-described embodiment, the player, not the game clerk, may be able to adjust the rotation angle and the brightness of the upper accessory. In such a case, it is desirable to display the menu screen by operating the operating means while the variable display is not in progress so that the rotation angle of the upper accessory can be set. It should be noted that the rotation angle and brightness of the upper accessory may be set during the fluctuation.

(12) In the above-described embodiment, the jackpot gaming state has been described as a representative example as an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player. However, not limited to this, the advantageous states that are advantageous to the player may include other advantageous states such as a high probability state (probability variation state), a time saving state, and a high base state.

(13) As an embodiment of this embodiment, a game machine in which the game medium is paid out to the player's hand when a prize is generated has been described, but the game medium is enclosed and the game medium is delivered to the player when a prize is generated. An enclosed game machine that adds game points (scores) without paying out at hand may be adopted. The enclosed game machine has a circulation path for circulating a plurality of balls, which is an example of a game medium, in the game machine, and is provided with a storage unit for storing game points, depending on the ball lending operation. The game points are added to the storage unit, the game points are subtracted from the storage unit according to the ball firing operation, and the game points are added to the storage unit according to the occurrence of a prize.

(14) In the above-described embodiment, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols and effect symbols of "1" to "9" are variablely displayed and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to the aspect. For example, the symbol to be variablely displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variablely displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to display a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

(15) In the above-described embodiment, a predetermined value exceeding 0% as the “ratio (ratio, probability)” has been described as a specific example. However, the "ratio (ratio, probability)" may be 0%. For example, when the occurrence rate of the predetermined game state 1 and the occurrence rate of the other game state 2 in the predetermined game period are compared and it is determined that "one occurrence rate is higher than the other occurrence rate". , The case where the occurrence rate of one of the gaming states is 0% is also included.

(16) In the above-described embodiment, after the variation display result when it is determined that the display result of the variation display is the probability variation jackpot is derived and displayed, the probability variation state is unconditionally changed after the end of the jackpot gaming state. An example of controlled probability change state control is shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the detection means detects that the game ball has passed through a specific area provided in the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 9020, the probability variation determining device is controlled to the probability variation state. Type probabilistic state control may be performed.

(17) It should be considered that the embodiments disclosed this time are examples in all respects and are not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 5A, 5X, 5Y ... Production display device 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 51 ... Window 100 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control CPU
250 ... 1st transparent body 251 ... Front transparent plate 252 ... 1st tubular body 253 ... 2nd tubular body 254 ... Reinforcing structure portion 260 ... 2nd transparent body 261 ... Rear transparent plate 270 ... Hole 300 ... 1st movable Body (movable body)
303 ... 1st protrusion 304 ... 2nd protrusion 901 ... Pachinko game machine 909 ... Production display device 9029L ... First upper accessory (frame movable body)
9029R ... Second upper accessory (frame movable body)
90100 ... Microcomputer for production control 90560 ... Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of controlling a plurality of types of gaming states including an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player and a special state that is different from the advantageous state and is advantageous to the player.
Movable body provided in the game frame and
The light emitting means provided on the movable body and
A control means for controlling the operation of the movable body and the light emission of the light emitting means,
A notification effect means for executing a notification effect for notifying the operation of the movable body is provided.
The control means controls the operation of the movable body by a first pattern of operating the movable body in relation to the notification effect and a second pattern of operating the movable body not related to the notification effect. ,
The degree of expectation to be controlled in the advantageous state differs depending on whether the movable body is operated in the first pattern or the second pattern.
The control means
The movable body is controlled by the same operation in the first pattern and the second pattern, and the light emission of the light emitting means is controlled by the same brightness in the first pattern and the second pattern.
When the control is performed in the special state, the control according to the first pattern is not executed, and when the control is performed in the non-special state, the control according to the first pattern can be executed.
As the notification effect, the notification effect means an effect of displaying an image imitating the operation of the movable body on a display means provided at a position not overlapping with the movable body in the front-rear direction.
When the control by the second pattern is executed when the control is performed in the special state, the control by the second pattern is executed when the control is controlled by the non-special state. There is a high degree of expectation that the favorable state will be controlled.
A game machine characterized by that.